JP2022025198A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technology capable of providing a novel game machine.SOLUTION: In a guide passage 500, there are an outer peripheral surface (an outer peripheral surface 502, an upper surface 840a) and an inner peripheral surface (an inner peripheral surface 504, a lower surface 840b). When a line passing an apex of the outer peripheral surface is a first reference line L1, and a rear most part on a lower surface of a design part (a decoration unit 800) of parts where vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can cross is a first design part D1, and a lowermost part on the lower surface of the design part of parts where vertical lines with respect to the first reference line L1 can cross is a second design part D2 among lines extending in a vertical direction with respect to a game board surface, the first design part D1 is positioned below the first reference line L1, a distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is diameter (4 mm) of a game ball or smaller, the second design part D2 is positioned below the first reference line L1, and a distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is diameter (40 mm) of the game ball or larger.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 81

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

Conventionally, as a technique related to this type of gaming machine, there is known a technique of providing a prohibited section of pre-reading effect after a predetermined time elapses after the start of fluctuation.

JP-A-2018-202068

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and innovative gaming machines are desired.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a novel gaming machine.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The wording and solutions in the following parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solutions can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can also be made into a higher conceptual by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

SOLUTION: The gaming machine of the present solution means a variable ball-entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution in which a special game is executed using the variable ball-entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. The means and the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game are provided, and the specific effect executing means is predetermined. When the conditions are set, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect may not be executed even if the gaming ball enters the variable ball-entry device during the execution of the special game.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following configurations.
(1) A variable ball entry device (special electric accessory, ordinary electric accessory) capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state is provided.
(2) If a player wins a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery) (big hit, small hit, ordinary symbol hit), a special game (big hit game, small hit) is used using the variable ball entry device of (1) above. A hit game, a normal electric accessory opening game) is executed.

(3) When a game ball enters the variable ball entry device of the above (1) during the execution of the special game of the above (2), a specific effect (cut-in effect) is executed with the ball entering as a trigger. The specific effect may be executed at the same time as entering the ball, or may be executed after a certain period of time has passed after entering the ball.

(4) When a predetermined condition is set (when a predetermined time has elapsed (70F has elapsed after the start of a small hit, 95F has elapsed after the start of a small hit), or when the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is ON. (When the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is ON), even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device of the above (1) during the execution of the special game of the above (2), the above ( The specific effect of 3) may not be executed.

According to the present solution, when a predetermined condition is set, the specific effect may not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific effect can be executed by setting the predetermined condition, and as a result, a novel gaming machine. Can be provided. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed at a late stage during the execution of the special effect, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present solution has, in any of the above-mentioned solutions, the specific effect has a first specific effect and a second specific effect, and the predetermined condition is the first. The second predetermined condition has a first predetermined condition that does not execute the specific effect of the above and a second predetermined condition that does not execute the second specific effect, and the second predetermined condition precedes the first predetermined condition. It is a gaming machine that is set and is characterized in that the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be terminated at the same time.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The specific effect has a first specific effect and a second specific effect.
(2) The predetermined condition has a first predetermined condition in which the first specific effect is not executed and a second predetermined condition in which the second specific effect is not executed.
(3) The second predetermined condition is set before the first predetermined condition.
(4) The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may end at the same time.

According to the present solution, since the specific effect is controlled by two predetermined conditions, it is possible to flexibly cope with a situation where the specific effect is executed a plurality of times, and as a result, a novel gaming machine is provided. Can be done.

Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present solution is a gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the above-mentioned solutions, the specific effect is executed according to a predetermined rule when the specific effect is executed a plurality of times.

In the present solution, when the specific effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed according to a predetermined rule (a rule that images are displayed alternately on the left and right). For example, even if a specific effect is not executed due to the setting of a predetermined condition, it is executed according to a predetermined rule (even if the part displaying the image from the right is not executed, the image is displayed from the right next time).

According to the present solution, since the specific effect is executed according to a predetermined rule, it is possible not only to maintain the continuity of the effect but also to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

Solution F1: The gaming machine of the present solution means a variable ball entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution in which a special game is executed using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. A means and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game are provided, and the specific effect executing means is predetermined. When the condition is set, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed, and the main body frame having the front frame and the inner frame may not be executed. The main body frame is provided with an outer frame to which the main body frame can be attached, the main body frame has a handle, the handle has a finger hook, and the handle can be rotated from an initial position to a maximum rotation position. When the handle is in the initial position, the finger hook does not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame, and the handle is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook is located. Is a gaming machine characterized in that is not projected below the lower edge of the main body frame.

According to the present solution, even when the main body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook portion does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle is not damaged. Therefore, the risk of damage to the parts can be reduced.

Solution F2: The gaming machine of this solution means a variable ball entry device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state, and a special game execution in which a special game is executed using the variable ball entry device when a predetermined lottery is won. A means and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game are provided, and the specific effect executing means is predetermined. When the condition is set, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed, and the front frame having the design portion formed on the upper portion may not be executed. A game board in which a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area is formed, and an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, which are arranged above the game area and guide the game ball to the right-handed area. Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board and the guide passage, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is set as the first reference line, and the portion where the vertical line with respect to the first reference line can intersect. The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is referred to as the first design portion, and the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is referred to as the second design portion among the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line can intersect. Then, the first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and the second design portion is the first. It is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located below the 1 reference line and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the present solution, the second design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the design portion should be enlarged. Can be done. Further, when the game ball is strongly launched (upper surface of the game ball passage) by making the distance between the first reference line and the first design part smaller than the diameter of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way. When the game ball rolls along the line), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
In addition, the solution means F1 and F2 can also exert the action and effect of the above-mentioned solution means 1. Further, the features according to the above-mentioned solutions 2 and 3 can be added to the solutions F1 and F2.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a front view which shows the part of a game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an interrupt management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol deviation time variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol time variation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time shortening, low-probability time shortening state). The second special symbol is a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows the 2nd special symbol small hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time shortening, low-probability time shortening state). The second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the count cut counter value management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during special symbol change. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the variation display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable prize device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable prize device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure example of a large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation processing of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the procedure of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variation symbol" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "9 round probability variation symbol" in a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a fireworks rush (1/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a fireworks rush (2/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 1st production example of a fireworks rush (3/3). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (1/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (2/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (3/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (4/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (5/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (6/7). It is a continuous figure which shows the 2nd production example of a fireworks rush (7/7). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the production management process during a fireworks rush (1/3). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the production management process during a fireworks rush (2/3). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the production management process during a fireworks rush (3/3). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the count-up counter calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the cut-in effect lottery process. It is a figure which shows the list of the character to display in a cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is 1 frame. It is a figure which shows the outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is 2 frames. It is a figure which shows the outline of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction of the prize ball number 9 and the update interval 1F to the count-up SE stop. It is a figure which shows the outline of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction of the prize ball number 7 and the update interval 2F to the count-up SE stop. It is a figure which shows the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of a prize in a small hit during a small hit rush. It is a figure which shows the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of a prize in a small hit after the second cut-in effect prohibition timing elapses. It is a figure which shows the outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of a prize in a small hit after the first cut-in effect prohibition timing elapses. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the game board unit of another embodiment independently. It is the schematic which shows the cross-sectional view of AA of FIG. 78. It is a figure which shows the outer rail. It is a figure which shows the game board, the outer rail and the rail base. It is a figure which shows the state which a game ball comes into contact with an outer rail. It is a figure which shows the outer rail and the game board. It is a figure which shows the periphery of the handle which the operation angle is 0 degree (the minimum angle). It is a figure which shows the periphery of the handle which the operation angle is 100 degrees (maximum angle). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the torque of a handle, and the movable position of a handle (Example 1). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the torque of a handle, and the movable position of a handle (Example 2).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes the above-mentioned game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-mentioned inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a saucer unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium charged in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, the outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, and the like (general sound) to execute the effect.

Further, in the center of the saucer unit 6, an effect switching button 45 is installed at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing the effect switching button 45, for example, during a pattern change, a big hit confirmation display, or a big hit game. It is possible to generate some kind of production (notice production, probabilistic promotion production, promotion production during a major role, etc.).

Further, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect content displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device so that the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. ..

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. Further, the performance display monitor 200 displays a set value (set value).

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED has a seven segment capable of displaying a decimal Arabic numeral and a dot segment located at the lower right thereof. It is composed of.
The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM (initializing RAM 76), that is, initializing RAM (RWM) installed in the main control device. Further, the setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing a setting or referencing a setting.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power supply control unit 162. Further, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. May be good.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, the game balls replenished from the replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, a game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is used in the first gaming state (for example, low probability non-time shortening state, low probability time shortening state, jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 30 operates, left-handed state, etc.). 1 game area (left-handed area), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is a second game state (for example, a big hit game state in which the second variable winning device 31 operates, and a small hit in which the second variable winning device 31 operates. It is a second gaming area (right-handed area, gaming area) used in a gaming state, a high-probability non-time shortening state, a right-handed state, etc.). Further, in the game area 8a, the upper start winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27 (first winning opening), the starting gate 20, the normal winning opening 22, the variable starting winning device 28, and the first are located around the effect unit 40. The variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31 (second winning opening), the deceleration passage 400, and the like are distributed and installed.

Of these, the upper start winning opening 26 and the variable start winning device 28 are arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the first variable winning device 30 is arranged in the lower part of the variable starting winning device 28. .. On the other hand, the right starting winning opening 27, the deceleration passage 400, and the second variable winning device 31 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Further, the starting gate 20 is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 8a, and the three ordinary winning openings 22 are arranged on the lower left side of the game area 8a.

The deceleration passage 400 is arranged between the right starting winning opening 27 and the second variable winning device 31, and is a passage through which a game ball that has not entered the right starting winning opening 27 passes. The deceleration passage 400 has two entrances and one exit, and the passage in the middle is a passage that turns the game ball left and right (meaners left and right).

Further, inside the passage of the deceleration passage 400, a plurality of protrusions 21 for decelerating the moving speed of the game ball are arranged. The plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged on the front side and the rear side with respect to the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit.

For example, the protrusion on the front side is arranged on the front side of the game board unit (for example, the back surface of the cover of the front transparent member constituting the deceleration passage 400), and the protrusion on the rear side is the rear side of the game board unit. It is arranged on the side (for example, the front surface of the cover of the back side transparent member constituting the deceleration passage 400).

In this way, since the plurality of protrusions 21 are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the game board unit 8, the game balls that randomly flow down can be advanced in a zigzag manner. The deceleration effect of can be improved.
The plurality of protrusions 21 are appropriately arranged not only inside the deceleration passage 400 but also at places where the game ball needs to be decelerated (for example, the upper part of the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31). ..

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of its flow, enters the normal winning opening 22, the upper starting winning opening 26, and the right starting winning opening 27, or during an opening operation. The ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation.

The game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the normal winning opening 22, enters the upper starting winning opening 26, or is variable-started at the time of opening operation. There is a possibility of entering the winning device 28 or entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the right starting winning opening 27 or the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the upper start winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the normal winning opening 22, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, The game ball entered in the second variable winning device 31 is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board 8b (a plywood material, a transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and accordingly, the lower start winning opening 28b is entered. Allows entry into the ball (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, a pair of left and right opening / closing members 28a, and these opening / closing members 28a reciprocate in the left-right direction along the board surface, for example, by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown). .. That is, as shown in the figure, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are in the closed position with the tips facing upward, and at this time, it is difficult (impossible) to enter the lower start winning opening 28b. On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is activated, the left and right opening / closing members 28a are displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, respectively, and the opening width of the variable start winning device 28 is expanded to the left and right. During this period, the game ball can easily flow into the lower start winning opening 28b. The variable start winning device 28 is a tongue piece type device that moves from the position where the opening / closing member is retracted to the back from the board surface to the position where it protrudes toward the front side, or the lower end edge portion of the opening / closing member is used as a hinge to move forward. It may be a device that is displaced so as to collapse.

The first variable winning device 30 operates when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the 9-round normal symbol and the 9-round probability variation symbol), and the first large winning opening 30b is entered. Allows ball entry (special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means). The first variable winning device 30 is a variable ball winning device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state.

The first variable winning device 30 (attacker) is a device arranged at the lower part of the upper starting winning opening 26, and has one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example, to open / close the opening / closing member 30a. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) along the board surface, and at this time, it is difficult to enter the first large winning opening 30b. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall forward with its lower end edge portion as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult (easy or possible), and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b.

The second variable winning device 31 (attacker) is in a special gaming state (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a 16-round probability variation symbol, or when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit). ) To enable entry into the second special winning opening 31b (special electric accessory, second special entry event generating means). The second variable winning device 31 is a variable ball winning device capable of shifting from a closed state to an open state.

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the deceleration passage 400 and has one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not difficult, and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 to the inside is arranged. The guide passage 31c is branched into two routes, and a second count switch 85 is arranged on each route.
The game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is detected by any of the second count switches 85, and is finally guided to the discharge port 31f and collected inside.

The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed in the center position of the game board unit 8. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts (including those not shown) inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with the movable body 40f for effect. The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the upper start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game area includes the game balls that have entered the normal winning opening 22, the upper starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the lower starting winning opening 28b, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31. All the game balls driven into 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamp to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is lit, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. Display the individual, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, a normal symbol working memory lamp 33a may be configured by using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the start gate 20, the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Then, each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage of the symbol (up to 4), the display mode is changed by one. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol has not yet started to change at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (1st symbol display means, 2nd symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a each have 0 to 4 lamps (LEDs), for example, 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of a combination of turning off, lighting, and blinking of the two lamps (LEDs). Displays the number of stored memory (means for displaying the number of stored memory). For example, in the display mode in which both the two lamps are turned off, 0 storage numbers are displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, one storage number is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is blinked and another lamp is lit, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. Display the individual, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is the upper start winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (every time a game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 26 or the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b). In the sense of remembering that a game ball has entered the lower starting winning opening 28b), the display mode changes to the display mode after increasing by one (up to 4), and the special symbol changes with the entry. Each time is started, the display mode is changed by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the right start winning opening 27, the game ball enters the right starting winning opening 27. (Up to 4 pieces), and each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the display state is changed by 1 piece. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the upper start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). Alternatively, the display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b). Further, when the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is not lit (the number of storages is 0), the game ball enters the right start winning opening 27 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation storage lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not started yet at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation storage lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74 and a RAM (main control board) together with a CPU core and registers (not shown). It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Of these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery or a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main control device 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a counter / timer circuit (CTC), which are circuits together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting change device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting change device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least the setting related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1 (setting changing means). Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting key keyhole 306 for inserting a setting key and a RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 and the setting key is pressed. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, the safety lock is locked by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the set value can be changed (setting change state). On the other hand, if the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 with the setting key rotated to the right, the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation state, setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times while the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of the six stages, for example.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment segment LED, or a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the keyhole for the setting key. By this operation, when the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment segment LED, the game status display device 38, or the like, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Details of setting change]
The details of the setting change are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is being changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
In the state where the setting is being changed, the main display (various lamps included in the game status display device 38) is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be displayed at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Ru. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (hidden) 1" display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off, the game is ready for play. Transition.

In the present embodiment, the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used in combination is described, but the setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Details of setting confirmation]
The details of the setting confirmation (see setting) are as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is set.
Similar to the state in which the setting is being changed, in the state in which the setting is being confirmed, the main display is not displayed, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all.

In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side of the performance display monitor, and a set value such as "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, in the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the setting is terminated, and once before the power is turned off. After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the upper start winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b), the right starting winning opening 27, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80, 82, and 83 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the upper starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b), and the right starting winning opening 27. be. Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof. As for the two second count switches 85, a configuration in which a common switch is used is given as an example, but two switches may be installed to individually detect the entry of a game ball.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a winning opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning opening 22. As for the three ordinary winning openings 22, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to enter a game ball into each ordinary winning opening 22. May be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78, 80, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, and the right starting winning opening switch 83 have the most direct influence on the interests of the player. Since it is a signal to be exerted, it is transmitted to the main control device 70 without particularly passing through a relay object, and other detection signals are transmitted to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87. The panel relay terminal plate 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

Further, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 has passed through the normal winning opening 22, the upper starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 27, the lower starting winning opening 28b, the first major winning opening 30b, the second major winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A merging passage for merging game balls is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in this merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main control device 70 each time the game ball is detected. The main control device 70 counts the number of out spheres based on the detection signal input from the out switch 99. Here, since the game balls fired in the game area 8a always pass through the confluence passage and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, the out switch 99 is the number of fired balls fired in the game area 8a. That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and are integrated. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 by relaying the panel relay terminal plate 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described with an example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, in the game board unit 8, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, and the first large winning opening solenoid 90 correspond to the upstream of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. The second large winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, and 97 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close (operate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let me. The solenoids 88, 90, and 97 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and a control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, the glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and the plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, the contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and causes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls to be executed. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above-mentioned external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and the payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the above-mentioned saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the above-mentioned flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is filled with the game balls, the more paid out game balls are released. As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent out to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in one minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. Will be sent to. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. do. In addition to this, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal board 118, and when the above CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120, the same firing is performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 has a built-in frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded in the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which the effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 has a built-in semiconductor memory such as ROM 128 and RAM 130 as a main memory together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position covered by the back cover unit 178.

Further, the effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72, gives commands to the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134, and emits various lamps 46 to 52 and the board lamp 53. It is processed to actually output sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus width of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, or each driver IC (I / O). The serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of.

The lamp drive circuit 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and the lamp drive circuit 132 switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps including LEDs. ), And manage the operation such as light emission and blinking. In addition to the above-mentioned glass frame top lamp 46 and glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, the various lamps include a board surface lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to the LED built in the above-mentioned effect unit, the LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Although the example in which the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136 is given here, the saucer illuminated substrate is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass frame decorative lamp 52 is decorated with the saucer. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp drive circuit 132 via a substrate.

Further, the acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator having a built-in sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, etc. (not shown), and the acoustic drive circuit 134 drives speakers 54, 55, 56 to output acoustics.

In the present embodiment, the glass frame illuminated board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame illuminated board 136 to various lamps 46. It is applied to ~ 52 and the speakers 54, 55, 56. Further, the above-mentioned effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is transmitted to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated board 136. Entered. Further, the above-mentioned jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame illuminated substrate 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame illuminated substrate 136. .. Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the glass frame illuminated board 136 is given, but when the above-mentioned saucer illumination board is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are used for the saucer illumination. It may be connected to the board.

In addition, a panel illuminated board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel illuminated board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57, respectively, via the panel illuminated circuit board 138.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a display processor VDP152 is mounted, together with a display control CPU 146 which is a general-purpose central processing unit. Of these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 148 and RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). Further, the VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 are integrated together with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program for controlling the effect, and the effect control CPU 126 executes the control of the effect according to this program. The control of the effect includes the control of the effect using various lamps 46 to 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 as described above, and the control of the effect by displaying the image using the liquid crystal display 42. .. The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information about the effect (for example, an effect number) to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives this transmits a concrete image for effect based on the basic information. Control the display.

The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Upon receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads out necessary image data from the image ROM 154, and transfers the necessary image data to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 into a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time), and based on the image data buffered here, each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is displayed. Drive individually.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The above-mentioned external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are transmitted to the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to the outside from. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value is, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortening state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the reset start process. The reset start process prepares the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by restoring the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or by clearing the backup information. It is a process for. Further, the reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

7 and 8 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S101: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the vector method interrupt mode (mode 2), and corrects the default RST method interrupt mode (mode 0). As a result, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute the designated interrupt handler.

Step S103: The main control CPU 72 now executes a reset standby process. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, turning on the power), and checking the main power cutoff detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the main power supply cutoff detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power supply cutoff detection signal is input from, for example, a power supply monitoring IC which is a peripheral device. Then, if the input of the main power supply cutoff detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. This makes it possible to protect the system when, for example, the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S105: Further, the main control CPU 72 and the mask register are initially set in order to set the interrupt mask. Specifically, the value that enables the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the RAM clear switch saved earlier, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), then step S107 is executed.

Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power cutoff process and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A55AH") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all the work areas (user work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76 except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the thumb check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Further, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power failure occurs.

Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect control return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends a return command (for example, a model specification command, a special symbol probability state specification command, a special symbol destination determination effect command, an operation memory count increase effect command, and an operation memory number) to the effect control device 124. (Decrease production command, count cut counter value command, special game state specification command, etc.) are sent. In response to this, the effect control device 124 determines the effect state (for example, the internal probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the acoustic output content, and various lamps) that were being executed when the power was cut off last time. (Light emission state, etc.) can be restored.

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes the state return process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the game state (for example, the display mode of the special symbol, the internal probability state, etc.) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the value of the backed up PC register.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (step S106: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs a command (command required for the effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of the prize ball to the payout control device 92.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes the CTC initial setting process and performs the initial setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) which is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector register, and also sets the interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue processing from the program address of the backed up PC register.

When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 8 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes a power failure occurrence check process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power cutoff detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power cutoff (decrease in drive voltage). When the power is cut off, the main control CPU 72 backs up the work area of the RAM 76 when the output port buffer corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, etc. is cleared. Back up the entire contents except the valid judgment flag and the sum check buffer, and save the sum result value in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above valid value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup valid determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops the process (NOP). On the other hand, if the power cutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU is made to execute such a process when a power failure occurs as an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) process.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) excluding jackpot determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) and hit determination random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols). Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 10), but the initial value of the loop counter (all) is updated every time the random number value makes one cycle in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S120 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S118 is that the same process is executed in another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 10), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle thereof is even faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number.

Step S121, Step S122: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 10). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart specifically showing an example of the procedure for the power failure occurrence check process.
Step S130: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power failure. This check condition can be set, for example, as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is continuously output.

Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power supply cutoff detection switch input port, and confirms whether or not the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly shown, the main power supply cutoff detection switch is mounted on, for example, the main control device 70, and the main power supply cutoff detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and its voltage level is set. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, a main power cutoff detection signal is output. The main power supply cutoff detection switch may be built in the power supply control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power supply cutoff detection signal has not been output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power supply cutoff detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-counter value set in the previous step S130 is subtracted by, for example, 1, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not 0 at this point (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power cutoff detection switch input port. Then, when the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

Step S136: As described above, the main control CPU 72 is used as a test signal terminal and a command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the thumb check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores "01H" indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop and stops all other processing in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power supply is cut off, backup power is supplied from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (not shown), so that the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power supply is cut off. Retained without doing. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the main power supply is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 7).

[Interrupt management process (timer interrupt process)]
Next, the interrupt management process (timer interrupt process) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the interrupt management process. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L pairs) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described above (step S120 in FIG. 8).

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes the input process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from the input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, the right starting winning opening switch 83, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening. Reads the input state (ON / OFF) of the winning detection signal from the switch 86.

Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the game is being played based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, and the right starting winning opening switch 83. The event that occurred in is determined, and another process is executed according to each event that occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the upper start winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, or the right starting winning opening switch 83, the main control CPU 72 has the first special symbol or the second, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers an internal lottery (lottery trigger) corresponding to a special symbol has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes the process corresponding to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the upper starting winning opening switch 80, the lower starting winning opening switch 82, or the right starting winning opening switch 83 will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Step S204a: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 includes a setting-related process including at least one of a setting change process executed when changing the setting value or a setting confirmation process executed when confirming the setting value. Can be executed (setting-related processing execution means). It should be noted that this process can be prevented from being executed when the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed (when the game is in the normal game state). Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to calculate a base and execute a process of displaying the calculated base on the performance display monitor 200. The main control CPU 72 is an out number indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area by the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening). The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means).

Step S205, Step S206a, Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes the normal symbol game process, the first special symbol game process, and the second special symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the normal symbol game processing (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is varied and displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. It is excited to operate the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in a mode of deviation after the fluctuation display.

Further, in the first special symbol game process (step S206a), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol (first lottery execution means), or changes by the first special symbol display device 34. The display and the stop display are controlled, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. Further, in the second special symbol game process (step S206b), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the second special symbol (second lottery execution means), or changes by the second special symbol display device 35. The display and the stop display are controlled, and the operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described later using yet another flowchart.

Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. In this process, the number of prize balls is instructed to the payout control device 92 based on the prize detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203). Outputs the prize ball instruction command. When the payout control device 92 (payout device) enters the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the big hit game (special game) or the small hit game (special game), Pay out game balls according to the predetermined number of prize balls.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 86 corresponding to the normal winning opening 22, a prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process (step S212 in FIG. 10).

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the starting port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the starting port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the expected value of the total number of game balls (the average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). It may be set. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are specified. When the above condition is satisfied, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal board 160. Store in the port output request buffer. The external information signal stored in the port output request buffer is transmitted to the data display device or the hall computer via the external terminal board 160.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a device or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time, and even if they are not won. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past few business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs various test signals indicating its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, fluctuation time shortening function operating). Generate and store these in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. It controls the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer in the previous normal symbol game process (step S205), the first special symbol game process (step S206a), and the second special symbol game process (step S206b) is used. Output to the port. The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, or the like is performed).

Step S211: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes an output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208) to the port. Further, the main control CPU 72 is a port in which the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, and the second special winning opening solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer are combined. Output.

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether there is a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 (command required for effect control) in the command buffer, and if there is an untransmitted command, the command to be output is output. Output to the port.

Step S213: Then, the main control CPU 72 clears the port output request buffer stored in the CTC interrupt this time.

In this embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S205 to S212 are executed as timer interrupt processes is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the value (01H) for specifying the interrupt end in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

Steps S215 and S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. After that, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S204 in FIG. 10). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S11 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol storage update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current normal symbol operating storage number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol. do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation storage number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S12.

Step S12: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the upper starting winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the upper starting winning opening 26 (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S13 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the lower starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 28b (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S15 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S16.

Step S16: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the right-starting winning opening switch 83 corresponding to the right-starting winning opening 27 (a lottery opportunity has occurred). When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S17 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S19 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S20.

Step S20: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 10).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol storage update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (set number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections for the first special symbol and four sections for the second special symbol (for example, 2 bytes each), and each section contains a big hit determination random number and a random number. The jackpot symbol random numbers can be stored as a set (set) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation storage number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value thereof. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number generator 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random number values relating to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random numbers is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. (Memory means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. This determination is made in the present embodiment because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In the case other than during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for making a judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the working memory number this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the working memory number "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it increases by one from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H", respectively, and as a result, the working memory number this time is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory number increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing (memory number notification means).

When the above procedure is completed or the number of first special symbol operation storages has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process. Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation storage number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation storage number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 12), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random value corresponding to the second special symbol (acquisition of the second lottery element, means for acquiring the lottery element). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (memory means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 12) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the big hit (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judgment. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper byte portion (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the increased operating memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (memory number notification means). .. Further, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 11).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 12, step S46 in FIG. 13). Execution means). As described above, this process performs the first special symbol (at the time of entering the upper start winning opening 26 or the variable start winning device 28 (lower starting winning opening 28b)) and the second special symbol (at the time of entering the right starting winning opening 27). It is executed for each of (at the time of entry). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process relating to the first special symbol or the process relating to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the random number value for the first determination. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, prior determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) at the time of operation of the “variation time shortening function”. For example, if the current state is when the "variation time shortening function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "off reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not it is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "variation time shortening function" is not activated, whether or not the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. To judge. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the caller's first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13). On the other hand, in the determination of step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not started yet. Specifically, if the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far have a winning value, the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to the "probability variation symbol (9-round probability variation symbol, 16-round probability variation symbol)". If it is, for example, "A0H" is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (look-ahead determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number stored so far has a winning value and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (look-ahead determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state scheduled flag is stored in, for example, the flag area of the RAM 76. In addition, although an example of performing a strict advance hit determination using the "probability state scheduled flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66 next.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned pre-determination process (step S80) of the variation pattern information at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 13). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 above, and from the result, the jackpot type is "normal symbol (9 round normal symbol)" or "probability variation symbol (9 round probability variation symbol, 16 round probability variation symbol)". To determine which of the above is applicable. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the prior determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a "normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "probability variation symbol". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the prior determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the advance hit determination is performed only by the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. As described above, the probability state scheduled flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent prior determination based on the immediately preceding prior determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. .. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the previous judgment result immediately before. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule (). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is for high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 or later is executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed after considering the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the prior determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 12) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 13).

[Parallel fluctuation of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol]
Next, the details of the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing will be described. In the present embodiment, by separately executing the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first special symbol display device 34 are performed. It is possible to display the variation of the second special symbol by the display device 35 in parallel (symbol parallel variation means). Therefore, in the present embodiment, for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol game process and the second special symbol game process are separately performed (1 in one interrupt cycle) under the control of the main control CPU 72. It is supposed to be executed (once).

[1st special symbol game processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol game processing.
The first special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1000a) for confirming whether or not the internal state flag is "start of big win (during big hit game)".

Step S1000a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state (internal state) corresponding to the second special symbol is "starting big role (during big hit game)". This confirmation can be performed based on the progress of the processing performed so far for the second special symbol (value of the second special symbol game management status). This confirmation is performed in the present embodiment because when the jackpot game is in progress with respect to the other second special symbol, the game related to the first special symbol is not advanced.

At present, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of the next step S1000b unless the jackpot game is in progress (the value of the second special symbol game management status is during the jackpot), particularly with respect to the second special symbol (No).

Further, in the first special symbol game process, a procedure (step S1000b) for confirming whether or not the variable time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the game state is a small hit is performed. Have. If the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is ON, it means that the fluctuation time measurement is paused, and if the fluctuation time measurement pause flag is OFF, the fluctuation time measurement is performed. It means that it is not paused.

Step S1000b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the variable time measurement pause flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON and the gaming state is in a small hit. In this embodiment, this confirmation is performed by temporarily measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the other second special symbol is in a small hit game and the first symbol is changing. This is because it is supposed to be stopped.

At present, if the variable time measurement pause flag is not ON, or even if the variable time measurement pause flag is ON but the game state is not small hit (No), the main control CPU 72 is in the next step. The processing after S1000b1 is executed. Steps S1000b1 to S6000 are program modules that are the basis of the first special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the first special symbol through the processes of steps S1000b1 to S6000, which are the basis thereof.

On the other hand, when the variable time measurement paused flag is ON and the small hit game is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S7000.

The basic part of the first special symbol game process is the special game special symbol determination flag update process (step S1000b1), execution selection process (step S1000c), special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), and special symbol change process (step). S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000), small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000) subroutine (program module) group is included. .. Here, first, the basic flow of the basic part of the first special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000b1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Here, the special game special symbol discrimination flag is a flag for specifying the symbol to be processed, and is stored in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, “0”) corresponding to the first special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1000c: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S2000 to step S6000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the first special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (first special symbol game management status). For example, if the first special symbol has not yet started the variation display (first special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (first special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is selected. If the variable processing is completed (first special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the first special symbol. Specifically, the jackpot determination (first lottery execution means) and the fluctuation pattern are determined here, and in the case of a jackpot, the winning type is also determined. Further, according to the determination of the winning type, the main control CPU 72 sets a number-of-count counter for the "time reduction state" and the "high probability state". The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the first special symbol is performed.

Further, in this process, a process of determining whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed. In the previous jackpot determination, for example, the first special symbol is changing the jackpot and the second special symbol is not elected. If applicable, the skip function is activated for the second special symbol. By operating this skip function, a process of forcibly ending the non-winning change of the second special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S4000: In the process of displaying the special symbol stop, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process at the time of big hit is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit in the previous special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of 9-round normal jackpot, 9-round probability variation jackpot, or 16-round probability variation jackpot, the normal state up to that point is changed to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state advantageous for the player). There will be an opportunity to make the transition. During the jackpot game regarding the first special symbol, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 has a preset number of continuous operations for a certain period of time (for example, for 29 seconds or until nine winnings are counted). It is excited over (for example, 9 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a fixed pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means, open game execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 9 times in total, this is referred to as "9 rounds". Collectively. In the present embodiment, not only 9-round normal jackpot and 9-round probabilistic jackpot, but also a plurality of types of 16-round probabilistic jackpot are provided as the types of jackpot.

When the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 or the first variable winning device for one round is set. 2 The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the first special symbol only in that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortening state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag). (High-probability state transition means, time-reduced state transition means, low-probability time-reduced state transition means, high-probability non-time-reduced state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, about 10 times higher than usual. Further, in the "time shortened state", the variable time shortening function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, the variable time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended to open. The number of times increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). It should be noted that the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state" may be shifted to only one of them in terms of control, or may be shifted according to both of them.

In the present embodiment, the "time shortening state" means that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is shortened by operating the fluctuation time shortening function, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high and variable. It means a state in which the opening time of the starting winning device 28 is extended (opening extension function operation).

Further, in the "non-time shortening state", since the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is not shortened, and the winning probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes low. It means a state in which the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is not extended (opening extension function is not activated).

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit in the process during the previous special symbol stop display. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000c), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can throw out a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be acquired. In this embodiment, since the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, this process is not executed. However, when the small hit is set for the first special symbol, this process is not executed. Is executed.

Step S7000: The process during suspension of variable time measurement is a process for maintaining the variation of the first special symbol without stopping it. The main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 when the small hit game is in progress with respect to the second special symbol and the first special symbol is changing. As the drive control of the first special symbol display device 34, a process of outputting an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) to each segment and dot (No. 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED is executed. As a result, the state in which the first special symbol is not stopped is maintained. If the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Even if the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit game is in progress with respect to the second special symbol, if the first special symbol is not changing, the variable time measurement paused process is not executed. Further, the measurement of the fluctuation time may be a forced termination instead of a temporary stop.

[2nd special symbol game processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol game processing.
The second special symbol game process first has a procedure (step S1900a) for confirming whether or not the other first special symbol is a big hit.

Step S1900a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming state corresponding to the first special symbol is “big hit gaming”. This confirmation can also be performed based on the value of the first special symbol game management status as described above. It should be noted that the reason why this determination excludes the determination as to whether or not the player is in the "small hit game" is that the first special symbol does not have a small hit.

At present, if the first special symbol is not in the big hit game (the first special symbol game management status is the value during the big hit) (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S1900a1 and subsequent processes. Steps S1900a1 to S6900 are program modules that are the basis of the second special symbol game processing, respectively. The main control CPU 72 can specifically control the progress of the game corresponding to the second special symbol through the processes of steps S1900a1 to S6900, which are the basis thereof.

As described in the first special symbol game process above, the special game special symbol discrimination flag update process (step S1900a1), execution selection process (step S1900b), and special symbol variation are also performed for the basic portion of the second special symbol game process. Pre-processing (step S2900), special symbol change processing (step S3900), special symbol stop display processing (step S4900), big hit variable winning device management process (step S5900), small hit variable winning device management process (step) A group of subroutines (program modules) of S6900) is included. The same contents as the first special symbol game processing will be omitted as appropriate.

Step S1900a1: The main control CPU 72 executes the special game special symbol determination flag update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a symbol to be processed as to which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be processed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a value (for example, “1”) corresponding to the second special symbol to the value of the special game special symbol determination flag.

Step S1900b: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S2900 to step S6900) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the second special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Similarly, which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (second special symbol game management status). For example, if the second special symbol has not yet started the variation display (second special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 performs the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2900) as the next jump destination. select. If the special symbol change pre-processing has already been completed (second special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol change processing (step S3900) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is selected. If the process during fluctuation is completed (second special symbol game management status: 02H), the process during display of special symbol stop display (step S4900) is selected as the next jump destination.

Step S2900: In the special symbol change preprocessing in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the change display of the second special symbol (second lottery execution means).

Step S3900: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer.

Step S4900: In the process during the special symbol stop display in the second special symbol game process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output to each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, whereby the stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

Step S5900: The variable winning device management process at the time of big hit is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit in the previous special symbol stop display processing. Here as well, the stop display mode of the second special symbol is determined according to the winning type. Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the second variable winning device for one round is set. The value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of 31 is completed. When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) with respect to the second special symbol only in that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished with respect to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, fluctuation time shortening function operation flag).

Step S6900: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit in the process during the previous special symbol stop display (special game execution means). For example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (for example, once to multiple times) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 to 1.8 seconds), so that the player is in the small hit game. In addition, there is a possibility that a certain amount of balls can be obtained.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, (1) "9-round normal jackpot", (2) "9-round probable variable jackpot" and (3) "16-round probable variable jackpot" are provided as a plurality of winning types. A big hit other than 16 rounds and 9 rounds may be set.

The above-mentioned winning types correspond to the types of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that are stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "16 round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of "16 round probability variation symbol", "9 round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of "9 round normal symbol", and "9 round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to "9 rounds". Corresponds to the big hit of "probability variation pattern". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning openings corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[9 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "9 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means, open game). Execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this is 9 Continue until the round. Therefore, in the big hit game of "9 rounds normal symbol", 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

In addition, in the case of "9 round normal symbol", even if the "variable time shortening function" is not activated in the previous game, the "variable time shortening function" is activated after the big hit game is completed. Then, it shifts to the "time reduction state".

The first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not wait. Will be closed.

[9 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "9 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means, open game). Execution means). In this case, the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, and this is 9 Continue until the round. Therefore, in the big hit game of "9 round probability variation symbol", 9 rounds of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

Further, in the case of corresponding to the "9-round probability variation symbol", the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the end of the big hit game, and the game shifts to the "high probability state".

[16 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state occurs (special game execution means, open game). Execution means). In this case, the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once over a sufficiently long time (for example, an opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the first round, which is 16 Continue until the round. Therefore, in the big hit game of "16 round probability variation symbol", 16 rounds of balls (prize balls) are given to the player.

Further, in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", the "probability fluctuation function" is activated after the end of the big hit game, and the game shifts to the "high probability state".

As described above, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned "9 round normal symbol", the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "variation time shortening function" operates after the big hit game ends, so that the internal state is It shifts to the "low probability time reduction state".

Further, if the winning symbol corresponds to the above-mentioned "9-round probability variation symbol" or "16-round probability variation symbol", the "probability fluctuation function" is activated and the "variation time reduction function" is not activated after the big hit game is completed. The internal state shifts to the "high probability non-time reduction state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The interval time between rounds is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning for the second special symbol. When the small hit is won, the small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game (game in which the second variable winning device 31 operates) is executed. Winning a small hit is a specific win.

Here, in the present embodiment, the small hit is not set for the first special symbol, but the small hit may be set for the first special symbol. However, in that case, in order to increase the occurrence rate of small hits in the 2nd special symbol lottery, the probability of falling into a small hit (special winning type) in the 1st special symbol lottery is higher than the probability of falling under the small hit (special winning type) in the 2nd special symbol lottery. It is preferable to specify a high probability of falling under a small hit. In the small hit game, the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds), so that the player can throw out a certain amount of balls during the small hit game. Can be acquired.

In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate, and the "variation time shortening function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" does not operate. No benefits will be granted to move to (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the small hit game ends, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached).

Further, the opening pattern of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit is not limited to one type, and a plurality of small hit symbols are set, a double opening pattern, a three-time opening pattern, a 12-time opening pattern, etc. You may set a plurality of open patterns such as. However, the small hit game ends within the first time (for example, 5 seconds) regardless of which opening pattern is set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol change preprocessing. The contents of the special symbol change preprocessing listed below can be common to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) and the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16). However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol. do. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2090: First, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether or not the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 is ON.

When it is determined that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2092.

Step S2092: The main control CPU 72 executes the stop symbol reading process. In this process, the information of the stop symbol saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, based on the read stop symbol information, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2094: The main control CPU 72 executes the remaining fluctuation time reading process. In this process, the value of the variable timer (value of the remaining variable time) saved in the RAM 76 is read out. Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the read variable timer in the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

Step S2096: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol revariation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the re-variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a revariation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This revariation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2098: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning off the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76. As a result, the situation in which the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended is canceled.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed in step S2090 that the variable time measurement paused flag is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2100.

Step S2100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the number of controlled special symbol operation memories (first special symbol operation memory number or second special symbol operation memory number) remains (is greater than 0). do. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of operation memories of the target symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S2150.

Step S2150: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol operation storage number is 0. That is, if the control target is the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not the second special symbol operation memory number is 0, and if the control target is the second special symbol, the first special symbol operation memory. Check if the number is 0. This confirmation can also be performed by referring to the value of the special symbol working memory counter. Then, when the other special symbol operation storage number is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not any start winning opening has won a prize for a predetermined time, and if it confirms that no prize has been won for a predetermined time, generates a command for demo production. .. The demo effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process. When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16). At the time of return, it returns to the end address of each special symbol game processing (the same applies hereinafter).

On the other hand, when the other special symbol operation storage number is not 0 (step S2150: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute the demo setting process, and the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol game. Return to the process (FIG. 16).

On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol operation storage number counter to be controlled is larger than 0 (step S2100: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2160.

Step S2160: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag with respect to the other special symbol. The big hit flag or the small hit flag is a flag set when a big hit or a small hit is hit by an internal lottery, and is reset at the end of the big hit game. Therefore, the confirmation in this process is a confirmation of whether or not the result of the internal lottery regarding the other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If the variation display of the other special symbol is not executed, the big hit flag or the small hit flag is not set, so that the confirmation result is inevitably No. Further, although the determination content is set to "big hit or small hit" here, only "big hit" or only "small hit" may be used.

In this process, when the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2202. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the big hit flag or the small hit flag related to the other special symbol, that is, when the value is "00H" (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S2200. To execute.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the special symbol to be controlled. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be controlled) stored in the RAM 76, and the value after the subtraction. Is set to "Working memory number at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process, the display mode of the stored number is changed (decreased by 1) for the control target of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. .. After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value (big hit determination random number value) is included in this range (first lottery execution means, second lottery execution means, second). Lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time differs between the low probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low probability state. To. Then, if the random value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag to "01H".

Step S2302: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit determination process (internal lottery).
When the above-mentioned big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The "small hit" here is something other than a non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the second variable winning device 31 as in the "big hit". If the read random value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag to "01H". In addition, the winning probability of the small hit of the second special symbol lottery is set to "approximately 1/1", and as long as it does not correspond to the big hit, it may correspond to the approximate small hit, and the small hit of the second special symbol lottery is won. The probability may be set to "about 1/2 to 1/4", and if it does not correspond to a big hit, it may correspond to a small hit or a miss.

In this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning (the means other than the non-winning), but the big hit determination table for each state is prepared in advance. The small hit determination table may be written in each ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2202: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the same process as in step S2200 above is performed, so the description thereof will be omitted. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination process is completed (step S2302), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2400.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S2402, and if the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2410 is executed.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous small hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be left, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol to be controlled (variation pattern determining means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to be controlled, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Fluctuation patterns include various fluctuation patterns such as non-reach fluctuation, reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation, etc. (the same applies to big hits and small hits). Information about the variation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to the effect control device as a variation pattern command.

Here, since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is the above-mentioned "high probability state" or "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process and is currently Check whether the state of is "high probability state" or "time reduction state". For example, in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to the shortened time (for example, about 4 to 12 seconds).

Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach is varied. May be shortened. However, when the special fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of stored items. The stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of deviation) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of deviation in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery by the first special symbol corresponds to non-winning, for example, "reach effect" may be generated and the result may be "reach effect". It is supposed to control the operation. Then, in the "disappearance variation pattern selection table", variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance, and if non-winning is applicable, the variation pattern is defined. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of 1st special symbol deviation pattern selection table]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the low-probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "6" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (hereinafter, the same applies).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" corresponds to. It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value in order with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number. In this embodiment, since the second special symbol is not set to be non-winning, there is no deviation pattern selection table for the second special symbol, but when the second special symbol is set to be non-winning, the second It is possible to prepare a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss regarding a special symbol.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the low probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "21" to "28" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The variation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to the variation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are the variation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state) when the first special symbol is out of alignment.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) in the high probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "41" to "48" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "48" correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[Second special symbol off-time fluctuation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time reduction / low-probability time reduction state)]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a second special symbol off-time fluctuation pattern selection table (low-probability non-time shortening / low-probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss in the low-probability non-time shortening or low-probability time shortening state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a few seconds to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation) is set. The table configuration is such that pattern 51) is selected (variable time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “51” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

[2nd special symbol out-of-time fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state)]
FIG. 23 is a second special symbol off-time fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of missing in the second special symbol in the high probability non-time reduction state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern) is set. The table configuration is such that 52) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “52” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

[See Fig. 18: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is missed (in the case of non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes), The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of a big hit (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, three types of winning symbols, which are selectively determined at the time of a big hit, are prepared. The breakdown of the three types is "9-round normal symbol", "9-round probable variation symbol", and "16-round probable variation symbol". It should be noted that each of the three types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "9 round normal symbol", "9 round normal symbol a", "9 round normal symbol b", "9 round normal symbol c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "35", "55", "10" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. Further, in the second column from the left, "9-round normal symbol", "9-round probable variation symbol", and "16-round probabilistic symbol" corresponding to each distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "9 round normal symbol" is 35/100 (= 35%), and the ratio of selecting "9 round probability variation symbol" is 100 minutes. 55 (= 55%), and the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol" is 10/100 (= 10%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the big hit symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Select the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "9 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". It will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Number of time reductions]
In the second column from the right of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (time reduction number) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when the "9-round normal symbol" is applicable, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, when it corresponds to the "9-round probability variation symbol" or the "16-round probability variation symbol", 0 times is set as the number of time reductions (the number of time reductions is not set).

[Probability change count]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number (probability fluctuation count, ST count) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, when the "9-round normal symbol" is applicable, 0 times is set as the probability variation number (the probability variation number is not set). On the other hand, when it corresponds to "9 round probability variation symbol" or "16 round probability variation symbol", 10000 times is set as the number of probability variation.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

Also in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "35", "5", "60" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "9-round normal symbol", "9-round probable variation symbol", and "16-round probabilistic symbol" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "9 round normal symbol" is 35/100 (= 35%), and the ratio of selecting "9 round probability variation symbol" is It is 5/100 (= 5%), and the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is specified as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, and the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It shows that it is. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H03H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect control output process described above. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol. The main control CPU 72 also generates a stop symbol command at the time of a small hit as well as at the time of a big hit.

[Number of time reductions and probability changes]
The values of the number of time reductions and the number of probable changes in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table are the same as the values in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table.

[See Fig. 18: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a 9-round normal jackpot, a 9-round probability variation jackpot, or a 16-round probability variation jackpot, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the jackpot. The "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table" defines fluctuation patterns corresponding to multiple types of "reach effects", and if it corresponds to a 9-round normal jackpot, a 9-round probability variable jackpot, or a 16-round probability variable jackpot, , One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected. In addition, when winning in a state where the fluctuation time shortening function is activated, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern without reach effect) is selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. May be good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is not distinguished between the 9-round normal jackpot, the 9-round probability variation jackpot, and the 16-round probability variation jackpot, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (the same applies hereinafter). ). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "71" to "78" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "71" to "78" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “72” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "81" to "88" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, the "comparison value" and the "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "91" to "98" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "91" to "98" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit without reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “92” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the first special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 101 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “101” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability non-time shortened state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern 102 per non-reach) is set. ) Is selected in the table structure.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

[See Fig. 18: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit.
In this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "9-round probability variation symbol" or "16-round probability variation symbol", the main control CPU 72 is in the flag area of the RAM 76. A value (01H) is set in the stored probability fluctuation function operation flag as the game state flag (high probability state transition means, probability fluctuation function operation means, advantageous game state transition means).

Further, in this process, when the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is "9 round normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. A value (01H) is set in the variable time shortening function operating flag as a flag (time shortening state transition means, variable time shortening function operating means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of a small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
The winning symbol at the time of a small hit may be only one type of "1 open small hit symbol", and other types such as "2 times open small hit symbol" and "3 times open small hit symbol" may be used. You may prepare it. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger a change in the subsequent state to a "high probability state" or a "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variable time value in the variable timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of off-normal fluctuation can be selected.

[2nd special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction / low probability time reduction state)]
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduction / low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit in a low-probability non-time shortening or low-probability time shortening state in the second special symbol lottery (variable pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is a specified time (for example, a few minutes to several hours)) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small) is set. The table configuration is such that the hit variation pattern 201) is selected (variation time defining means).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “201” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

[2nd special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state)]
FIG. 33 is a second special symbol small hit variation pattern selection table (high probability non-time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of a small hit with the second special symbol in the high probability non-time reduction state (variation pattern defining means).
In this table, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time is, for example, about 0.5 to 10.0 seconds) is set, and in this selection table, one predetermined fluctuation pattern (non-reach small hit fluctuation pattern) is set. The table configuration is such that 202) is selected.

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “202” as the variation pattern number regardless of the acquired variation pattern determination random value.

[See Fig. 18: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above.

Step S2416: The main control CPU 72 executes the count-cutting counter value management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the value of the number-cut counter value. The details of the process will be described later. Further, such a process may be executed in the process during the special symbol stop display.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000 or step S3900) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Figs. 15 and 16: Processing during special symbol change]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing (step S3000 or step S3900), the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer set as described above from the register to the timer counter, and then the passage of time (clock pulse count number). Or, the value of the timer counter is decremented according to the value of the interrupt counter). Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to be controlled until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination.

Further, in this process, a process of determining whether or not to activate the skip function is also performed, and in the large hit determination or small hit determination of the previous special symbol change preprocessing, one of the special symbols is in the process of being out of order and is changing. When it is determined that the other special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, the skip function is activated for one special symbol. By operating this skip function, the variable display of one of the special symbols is forcibly terminated.

[FIGS. 15 and 16: Processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 or step S4900), the main control CPU 72 uses the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2092, step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 18). Controls the stop display of. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 clears the symbol changing flag.

Here, the execution conditions of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S2300) and small hit determination process (step S2302) will be briefly described.

[Internal lottery correspondence table]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a correspondence table of the internal lottery.
In the correspondence table of the internal lottery, when the corresponding special symbol executes the big hit lottery (big hit judgment processing) or the small hit lottery (small hit judgment processing) of the internal lottery, it is executed based on the state of the other special symbol. It shows that it is decided whether or not to do it.

When the other special symbol is "during big hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the big hit flag is 01H)", the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing".

Similarly, when the other special symbol is "small hit fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the small hit flag is 01H)", in the internal lottery of the special symbol, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are performed. Not executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to "missing". In the case of "small hit fluctuation (change display when the small hit flag is 01H)", a method of executing the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery may be adopted.

On the other hand, when the other special symbol is "out of place fluctuation (during display of fluctuation when the big hit flag or small hit flag is 00H)", the big hit lottery is first executed in the internal lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, if it does not correspond to a big hit, a small hit lottery is executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery of the special symbol corresponds to either "big hit", "small hit" or "missing". It should be noted that the out-of-order fluctuation includes waiting for the fluctuation and a stop display.

In this way, when one special symbol is "big hit fluctuating" or "small hit fluctuating", the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the other special symbol, and as a result, the big hit game or The small hit game is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is "during big hit fluctuation" or "during small hit fluctuation", the other special symbol is substantially in a state of no lottery of big hit or small hit.

[Counter value management process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the number-cutting counter value management process. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described according to an example.

Step S2420: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading the count cut counter value. As for the "count cut counter value", the respective counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state". In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10,000 times), but the number cut counter for the time reduction state is not set. .. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S2422: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-cut counter value is not 0 (No), after the number-cut counter value command (time reduction count specification command, special count specification command, ST count specification command, etc.) is generated, the main control CPU 72 is next. Step S2424 is executed.

Step S2424: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-count counter value.
Step S2426: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the count cut counter is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2428. On the other hand, when the value of the count cut counter is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 18).

Step S2428: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of resetting the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the "high probability non-time reduction state", the number-of-count counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 10,000 times), so that the reset is performed in this case. Only the probability fluctuation function activation flag. Further, when shifting to the "low probability time shortening state", the number-of-times cutting counter related to the time shortening state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that the variable time shortening function is reset in this case. Only the activation flag.

Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 18).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned special symbol storage area shift process. The content of the special symbol storage area shift processing can be common to the processing of the first special symbol and the processing of the second special symbol. However, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol, the control target is the second special symbol. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: First, the main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 corresponding to the special symbol to be controlled. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2212: Further, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the special symbol to be controlled. For example, if the special symbol to be controlled is the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol, and the special symbol to be controlled is the second special symbol. If so, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2214: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” for the special symbol to be controlled from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction.

Step S2216: Further, the main control CPU 72 sets an operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled. The effect command set here is also generated as a command having a length of one word, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ") Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an added value (for example," 10H ") meaning" decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption ". Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit becomes "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. That is, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the working memory number "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the working memory number this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol. If the control target is the second special symbol, the preceding value is a value (for example, "BCH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2218: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command for the special symbol to be controlled set in the previous step S2216 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the processing during special symbol change. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the special symbol changing processing described below can be common to the first special symbol game processing (FIG. 15) and the second special symbol game processing (FIG. 16). That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S3100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the variable timer (decrementes the value corresponding to the interrupt cycle) for the special symbol to be controlled.

Step S3200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the variable timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the fluctuation timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000b in FIG. 15 or step S1900b in FIG. 16) even in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during special symbol variation display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the fluctuation display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3300.

Step S3300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag for the special symbol to be controlled. When the value (01H) is set in the jackpot flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3400. On the other hand, when the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S3600.

Step S3400: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. In this confirmation process, is it necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol (forcibly terminate the other missed variation) when the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the target special symbol ends? It is executed to confirm whether or not. Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S3500, assuming that it is necessary to activate the skip function for the other special symbol. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the skip function does not need to be activated. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 steps next. Execute S3600.

Step S3500: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the skip function for the other special symbol. That is, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of terminating the variable display relating to the other special symbol. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the variable timer for the other special symbol to 0.

Step S3600: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol variation end processing. In this process, a value (01H) is set in the symbol stop display in-display flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76 as the variable display of the special symbol to be controlled ends. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 or step S4900) as the next jump destination. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the first special symbol game process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol game process (FIG. 16).

Here, the big hit lottery probability and the small hit lottery probability of the gaming machine of this embodiment are set as follows.
For example, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the normal state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a low probability state) is set to about 1/319. Further, the jackpot probability when the gaming state is an advantageous state (the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a high probability state) is set to about 1/100. Further, the small hit probability is defined according to the type of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state, and since the first special symbol does not have a small hit, there is no small hit probability. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to about 1 / 1.1. For this reason, the second special symbol lottery is set to be more likely to correspond to a small hit than the first special symbol lottery (winning type defining means).

[Skip function and fluctuation time measurement pause function]
Hereinafter, the skip function for forcibly stopping the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol display device 34 are temporarily stopped. The function will be described in detail.

FIG. 38 is a timing chart showing changes in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
Of these, (A) in FIG. 38 shows an "example in which the skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function are not activated", and the first special symbol corresponds to the loss while the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each variation display when the skip function and the variation time measurement pause function do not operate when the variation display is started.

Further, FIG. 38 (B) shows an "example of operating the fluctuation time measurement pause function", and the fluctuation display corresponding to the deviation of the first special symbol while the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is a small hit is shown. It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display when the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated when is started.

Further, FIG. 38 (C) shows a "skip function operation example", when the first special symbol starts the fluctuation display corresponding to the big hit during the fluctuation display when the second special symbol is off. , It is a timing chart which shows the change of each fluctuation display at each time when the skip function is activated. The skip function and the fluctuation time measurement pause function will be described by taking the timing charts (A) to (C) as an example.

[(A) in FIG. 38: Example of non-operation of each function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of big hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not performed in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, a loss (non-winning) is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the variation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display ends at time t2. Is being done. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, since the variation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0 at time t2, the variation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss. Since the result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is not won, the skip function does not operate for the second special symbol here. Therefore, the variable display regarding the second special symbol is continued. That is, the variable timer related to the second special symbol (at the time of big hit) is not replaced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of a big hit (may be a small hit) in one special symbol, the other special symbol is used. Of the internal lottery related to symbols, the big hit lottery is not executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a big hit, the other special symbol is in a non-lottery state.

[(B) in FIG. 38: Example of operation of variable time measurement pause function]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of a small hit.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner at the time of a small hit, the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is not executed in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery is out of order. In the illustrated example, the deviation is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

However, here, it is assumed that the fluctuation at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol ends at the time tx, which is the time between the times t1 and t2. Then, the small hit game related to the second special symbol is executed after the time tx. Here, it is assumed that the small hit game is executed from the time tx to the time t2. Then, the fluctuation time measurement pause function is activated, and the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is paused. Then, when the small hit game ends at time t2, the measurement of the remaining fluctuation time is restarted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball wins the starting winning opening for the other special symbol during the variable display at the time of a small hit in one special symbol, the internal lottery for the other special symbol is performed. The big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are not executed. Then, when the small hit game with one special symbol is started, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is restarted after the small hit game is completed. To. A big hit lottery may be performed during the small hit fluctuation.

[(C) in FIG. 38: Example of skip function operation]
The state of each special symbol at time t0 indicates that the first special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state and the second special symbol is in the fluctuation display at the time of disconnection.

Then, at time t1, when the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol, an internal lottery regarding the first special symbol is executed, and the first special symbol is executed based on the result of the internal lottery. The variable display is started on the display device 34. Here, since the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner when it is removed, the big hit lottery is first executed in the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol, and the small hit lottery is performed when the big hit is not applicable. That is, the first special symbol is in a state where the big hit lottery can be executed. Therefore, the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. If a small hit is not selected in the first special symbol lottery, a big hit or a miss is applicable. In the illustrated example, a jackpot is selected as a result of the internal lottery for the first special symbol, the fluctuation time for the first special symbol is set between t1 and t2, and the variation display is set to end at time t2. There is. Specifically, the time from time t1 to t2 is set in the variable timer related to the first special symbol. The variable timer represents the time during which the variable display can be executed, and is subtracted from the variable timer only for the time when the variable display is executed, and the variable display ends when the variable timer becomes 0.

Next, since the variation timer for the first special symbol becomes 0 at time t2, the variation display for the first special symbol ends, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit. It should be noted that the result of the internal lottery regarding the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed is a big hit, and further, since the variable display regarding the second special symbol is being executed, the skip function is activated. Then, by the operation of this skip function, the fluctuation display at the time of a miss or a small hit regarding the second special symbol is terminated (forced termination means). Specifically, the variable timer related to the second special symbol is replaced with 0. Therefore, the set fluctuation time will be skipped. It should be noted that, unlike the operation example in FIG. 38 (B), the variation display at the time of the skipped second special symbol is not executed again.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening for the other special symbol during the fluctuation display at the time of deviation in one special symbol, the big hit lottery or the small lottery is performed in the internal lottery for the other special symbol. A winning lottery is executed. That is, when one of the special symbols is not in the variable display at the time of big hit or small hit, it means that the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is possible for the other special symbol. For example, if the game ball wins a prize in the starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol while the fluctuation is displayed when the second special symbol is out of alignment or the second special symbol is in the fluctuation waiting state as described above, the first Of the internal lottery for special symbols, the big hit lottery is executed first, and then the small hit lottery is executed. In addition, while the fluctuation display of one special symbol (second special symbol) at the time of skipping or small hit is started, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) at the time of big hit is started and ends after the fluctuation time elapses. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols (second special symbol) is skipped, and the variable display can be forcibly terminated.

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000 in FIG. 15 or step S4900 in FIG. 16). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described. The contents of the special symbol stop display processing described below can also be common to the first special symbol game processing and the second special symbol game processing. That is, when the following procedure is applied to the first special symbol game processing, the control target is the first special symbol, and when it is applied to the second special symbol game processing, the control target is the second special symbol.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer for the special symbol to be controlled (decrement by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15 or step S1900b in FIG. 16) even in the next interrupt cycle, and processes during special symbol stop display. Is repeated.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set.

Step S4603: Then, when it is confirmed that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4300: Yes), the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. do. This confirmation process is performed in order to confirm whether or not it is necessary to activate the fluctuation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol when the variation display at the time of a small hit of the target special symbol ends. Will be executed.

Then, when it is confirmed that the other special symbol is in the variable display (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next steps S4604a, assuming that it is necessary to activate the variable time measurement pause function for the other special symbol. And step S4604b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (No), it is assumed that the other special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and it is not necessary to activate the variable time measurement pause function, and the main control CPU 72 Then executes step S4605.

Step S4604a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of activating the variation time measurement pause function for the other special symbol, that is, a process of saving the variation information of the other special symbol. Specifically, in order to temporarily stop the measurement of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 transmits the current fluctuation timer value (the value of the remaining fluctuation time) and the stop symbol information to the RAM 76. Execute the process to save.

Step S4604b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of turning on the variable time measurement paused flag stored in the RAM 76 (variable time measurement pause means). As a result, the measurement of the fluctuation time is suspended.

Step S4605: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit game in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control for the special symbol to be controlled. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress for the special symbol to be controlled. The state command indicating that the small hit game is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4600: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table for the special symbol to be controlled to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated, and the fluctuation time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big role (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 round probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variation symbol", a value representing "9 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the special symbol to be controlled is in the middle of a big hit. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the above effect control output process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 round probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "9 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process described above. When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.
If the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set and the value is simply off (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Then, when the processing of step S4500, step S4602 or step S4606 is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing (FIG. 15 or FIG. 16).

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 10) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34 and the second as described above. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the fluctuation time reduction function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the non-probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d is turned on. It can be switched (off) to the display. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 lights up for the LED corresponding to the time saving state display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Output a signal. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. In this case, the main control CPU 72 determines the launch direction of the game ball according to the progress of the game (value such as special game management status or internal state) (launch direction determining means). For example, when the gaming state is a left-handed gaming state (when it is a low-probability non-time shortening state, when it is a low-probability time-shortening state, or when it is a jackpot gaming state using the first variable winning device 30), the main control The CPU 72 determines that the game ball should be launched into the first game area (left-handed area). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a right-handed gaming state (when it is a high-probability non-time shortening state, it is a big hit gaming state using the second variable winning device 31 or a small hit gaming state), the main control CPU 72 Determines that the game ball should be launched into the second game area (right-handed area). Then, when it is determined that the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a launch position designation command. The launch position designation command includes information for identifying whether the gaming state is the left-handed gaming state or the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state. The generated launch position specification command is transmitted to the effect control device.

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing "16 rounds (16R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "9 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a representing "9 rounds (9R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot opening / closing operation process. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing at the time of the jackpot. If the operation process is completed, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) at the time of a big hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the big hit big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process (as the next jump destination). Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

When the jackpot game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the jackpot game to indicate to the effect control device 124 that the jackpot game is in progress.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening number of each round and opening time), interval time between rounds, and count number in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol of this time. Select the number of winnings). The opening pattern of the big winning opening and the interval time between rounds for each winning symbol are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG.

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 18). Specifically, if the major classification "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16. Further, if "9 round normal symbol" or "9 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 9. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example, as a corresponding value (“8” for 9 times, “15” for 16 times) on the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern operation pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer, the opening time is sufficient so that the ball can easily enter the big winning opening during one opening. (For example, the time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time hardly occurs (it becomes difficult) even if it is not impossible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. ) It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot time interval timer based on the jackpot opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the big hit.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first special winning opening 30b or the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 42) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the large winning opening opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5308. To execute.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening 30b or the second large winning opening 31b being opened) is counted within the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during the big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41). Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

When it is determined in step S5306 above that the opening time for the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then performs step S5312. Execute.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first special winning opening 30b or the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer set in the above-mentioned big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 42).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand winning opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 41) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the "number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern.
When the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation multiple times in one round is not adopted as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 17), the “number of times set in the current round” in each round is 1 in each round. Set for each time. Therefore, in each round, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the above steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 41). Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after the increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41).

Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 41). To execute. Then, after the execution of the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the big hit big winning opening closing process is executed, and the main control CPU 72 again executes the big hit big winning opening closing process, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of a big hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the jackpot flag. As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5508: When the value is set in the probability variation function operation flag (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, 10000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, for example, and becomes the above-mentioned number-cutting counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol changes (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since the high probability state is not provided with a substantial upper limit, the probability that the probability variation number is subtracted to 0 is low. If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 18) during the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value is set in the variable time shortening function operation flag (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times). The set time reduction count value is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the variable time shortening function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the major winning combination, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability medium" is generated as the internal state, and if the fluctuation time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction". Generates a state specification command that represents "medium". These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect control output process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15 and step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 41).

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hit large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end process (step) as the next jump destination. Select S6500). Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In this embodiment, a "small hit opening pattern" is set according to the winning symbol. For example, when the one-time opening is selected, the opening pattern of "0.6 seconds opening" is set, and when the two-time opening pattern is selected, the first and second opening patterns are "0.8 seconds opening" respectively. The opening pattern of is set. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the second variable winning device 31 is operated.

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is a game ball on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. Is set to a time (for example, about 2 seconds) in which the timers are lined up without gaps.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management processing (FIG. 46). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

At the start of the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a small hit start command indicating that the small hit game has started to the effect control device 124.
When the small hit game is in progress, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command during the small hit game indicating that the small hit game is in progress to the effect control device 124.
At the end of the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a small hit end command indicating that the small hit game has ended to the effect control device 124.

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the second special winning opening 31b. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 47) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the second variable winning device 31 (the opening second large winning opening 31b) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). As described above, this predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 has the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the second grand prize opening 31b. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 47).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 47). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 46). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set number of opening (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the open count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of a small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 46).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets (00H) the value of the small hit flag, and also erases "small hit game in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000c in FIG. 15 and step S1900b in FIG. 16) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when a “9-round normal symbol” or a “9-round probability variation symbol” is applicable in the normal mode.

When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, [F1] the game is started from the normal mode. [F1] In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the upper start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game starts to change. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "9 round normal symbol", [F3] 9 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, and you will be defeated in the battle of [F4] big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] In the coastal mode, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "high probability state" (low probability time shortened state). In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.
In the [F5] coastal mode, the first special symbol mainly fluctuates, so that the game flow is the same as in the normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F7] "9 round probability variation symbol", [F3] 9 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] you win the battle of the big role production. , [F9] Move to fireworks rush. [F9] In the fireworks rush, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "high probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "low probability state" (high probability non-time shortening state).

Although not shown in particular, if the jackpot of the "16-round probability variation symbol" is applicable in the [F1] normal mode, the 16-round jackpot game is executed, and the game shifts to the [F9] fireworks rush.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when the fireworks rush corresponds to the “16 round probability variation symbol”, the “9 round probability variation symbol”, or the “9 round normal symbol”.

If you win the big hit of [G1] "16 round probability variation symbol" in [F9] fireworks rush, [G2] 16 round big hit game (special bonus) is executed, and after the big hit game is over, it shifts to [F9] fireworks rush. do.

If you win the big hit of [G3] "9 round probability variation symbol" in [F9] fireworks rush, [G4] 9 round big hit game (normal bonus) is executed, and after the big hit game is over, it shifts to [F9] fireworks rush. do.

If you win the [G5] "9 round normal symbol" jackpot in the [F9] fireworks rush, the [G4] 9 round jackpot game (normal bonus) will be executed, and after the jackpot game ends, you will switch to the [F5] coast mode. do.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the internal lottery of the big hit is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they are not visually appealing. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol or the like is executed.

The effect symbols include, for example, an upper effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a lower effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the upper effect symbol constitutes a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1", and the middle effect symbol and the lower effect symbol are in ascending order of numbers "1" to "9". It constitutes a row of symbols lined up in. Such a symbol sequence is variablely displayed so as to flow horizontally (scroll to the left) in each of the upper region, middle region, and lower region on the screen.

Further, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a storage marker indicating the number of working memories and the marker indicating that the symbol is changing can be displayed, followed by a number holding marker, an upper / middle / lower effect symbol. "Fourth symbol Z1, Z2 (fourth effect symbol)" can be displayed.

53 to 55 are continuous views showing an example of the first effect of the fireworks rush.
The first effect example is an effect example in which the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the outlier and the outlier variation is selected.
The fireworks rush is in a so-called small hit rush state (a state in which small hits occur frequently when hitting to the right).

In FIG. 53 (A): The out-of-order fluctuation of the second special symbol in the fireworks rush is executed. The fourth symbol Z2 is also in a fluctuating state. The first special symbol is in a stopped state. In the illustrated example, the 0th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed. One second is 30F (frame).

In the fireworks rush, the game is played by hitting right. The right-handed game ball may enter the right-starting winning opening 27, or may enter the deceleration passage 400 without entering the right-starting winning opening 27. Then, the game ball that has passed through the deceleration passage 400 heads for the second variable winning device 31. Here, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member 31a and heads downstream.

[Point production]
In the lower center of the screen, a game ball enters the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (first big winning opening or second big winning opening) during a big hit or a small hit rush. As a result, the total number of game balls paid out by the payout control device 92 is displayed as the payout point P.

In the illustrated example, since "1200" is displayed as the payout point P, 1200 game balls have been released by entering the large winning openings (first major winning opening and second major winning opening) by this point. Indicates that it has been paid out.

In FIG. 53 (B): The effect symbol is changing at high speed. In the illustrated example, the 20th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

In FIG. 54 (C): The upper effect symbol (upper line) is stopped ("8"-"blank symbol"-"7"). In the illustrated example, the 35th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

In FIG. 54 (D): The lower effect symbol (lower line) is stopped ("5"-"blank symbol"-"6"). In the illustrated example, the 55th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed.

FIG. 55 (E): The middle stage effect symbol (middle stage line) is stopped ("1"-"blank symbol"-"2"). In the illustrated example, the 75th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed. Then, when the middle stage effect symbol is stopped, the sway effect of the effect symbol is started, and this sway effect continues for 35F.

In FIG. 55 (F): The stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect is executed in a mode that does not accompany the shaking effect of the effect symbol. The confirmation start is the 105th floor after the start of the fluctuation, the confirmation time continues for 15F, and the confirmation ends at the 120th floor. The fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a disengaged manner.

Even if the deviation fluctuation is completed, the second variable winning device 31 does not shift to the open state, so that the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member 31a and heads downstream.

56 to 62 are continuous views showing a second production example of the fireworks rush.
The second effect example is an effect example when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a small hit and the small hit variation is selected.
It should be noted that the flow of the effect until the middle stage effect symbol is stopped is the same regardless of whether the variation is an out-of-order variation or a small hit variation, so the example of the effect up to that point is omitted.
The following production example is an production example executed following the production example of FIGS. 53 and 54.

In FIG. 56 (A): The middle stage effect symbol (middle stage line) is stopped ("1"-"blank symbol"-"2"). In the illustrated example, the 75th floor after the start of fluctuation is displayed. In the case of the out-of-order fluctuation, when the middle stage effect symbol is stopped, the effect symbol shake effect is started, but in the case of the small hit variation, the effect symbol shake effect is not executed.

In FIG. 56 (B): The stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect is executed in a mode that does not accompany the shaking effect of the effect symbol. For example, the confirmation start is the 75th floor after the start of the fluctuation, the confirmation time continues for 8 ms, then the opening of the small hit game is executed for 8 ms, the second variable winning device 31 opens for 684 ms, and the small hit The ending of the game and the effective entry time (TZ) of the small hit game are executed for 800 ms, respectively. The fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit.

When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of a small hit, the small hit game is started. When the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 31 is opened by pulling the opening / closing member 31a to the back side. Therefore, the game ball passes by the opening / closing member 31a and enters the second special winning opening 31b, and eventually the entry is detected by the second count switch 85.

[Enlarged production]
In FIG. 57 (C): When a predetermined first frame elapses from the start of the small hit game, the enlargement effect is executed. The enlargement effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the display of the payout point P while moving it to the center of the screen. The predetermined first frame can be set to an arbitrary value according to the specifications of the game, and can be, for example, the 15th frame from the start of the small hit.

[First cut-in production]
FIG. 57 (D): During the small hit game, when the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect is an effect that may be executed up to twice during one small hit game. The cut-in effect here is an effect of displaying the first character C1 of the normal pattern from the left side of the screen. Further, when the ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the count-up effect of counting up (scrolling display) the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started. The reproduction of the count-up SE ends when the value of the count-up counter reaches 0 (hereinafter, the same applies). The count-up SE is a sound that expresses the rotation of the drum, and is output from a speaker or the like.

[Second cut-in production]
FIG. 58 (E): During the small hit game, when the second count switch 85 detects a second ball entry, the second cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is an effect of displaying the second character C2 of the normal pattern from the right side of the screen. Further, when the entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the count-up effect of counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Reduction effect]
In FIG. 58 (F): When a predetermined second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit game, the reduction effect is executed. The reduction effect is an effect of reducing and displaying the display of the payout point P while moving it to the center of the lower part of the screen (effect of returning to the original display mode). The display of the payout point P is "1230". The predetermined second frame can be set to an arbitrary value according to the specifications of the game, and can be, for example, the 60th frame from the start of the small hit.

In FIG. 59 (G): When the small hit game is completed, the next fluctuation starts. In this case, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member 31a and heads downstream.

[Small hit game, enlarged production]
In FIG. 59 (H): When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game is started. When a predetermined first frame elapses from the start of the small hit game, the enlargement effect is executed.

[First cut-in production]
In FIG. 60 (I): During the small hit game, when the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is an effect of displaying the third character C13 of the special pattern from the left side of the screen. Further, when the entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the count-up effect of counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Prohibition of second cut-in production]
In FIG. 60 (J): If the second count switch 85 detects a second ball entry during the small hit game, the second cut-in effect is normally executed. However, here, the second cut-in effect is not executed because the section has shifted to the specific effect prohibited section. The details of the specific production prohibited section will be described later. Further, when the entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the count-up effect of counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

[Reduction effect]
In FIG. 61 (K): When a predetermined second frame elapses from the start of the small hit game, the reduction effect is executed. The reduction effect is an effect of reducing and displaying the display of the payout point P while moving it to the center of the lower part of the screen. The display of the payout point P is "1260".

In FIG. 61 (L): When the small hit game is completed, the next fluctuation starts. In this case, since the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the opening / closing member 31a and heads downstream.

[Small hit game, enlarged production]
In FIG. 62 (M): When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, the small hit game is started. Further, when a predetermined first frame elapses after the small hit game is started, the enlargement effect is executed.

[First cut-in production]
In FIG. 62 (N): During the small hit game, when the first ball entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the first cut-in effect is executed. The cut-in effect here is an effect of displaying the fourth character C4 of the normal pattern from the right side of the screen. In this way, even if the cut-in effect is prohibited, the rule of displaying characters alternately on the left and right is observed. Further, when the entry is detected by the second count switch 85, the count-up effect of counting up the number of the payout point P is executed, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is started.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the above effect will be described. All of the above-mentioned effects are controlled through the following control processes.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from, for example, a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), working memory effect management process (step S401), effect symbol management process (step S402), fireworks rushing effect management process (step S403), and display output process (step S404). , Ramp drive processing (step S406), acoustic drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. In addition, the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when the number of operation memories increases, an effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, a start opening winning sound control command, and a demo effect. Command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, status specification command, round number command, count cut counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, launch position specification command, jackpot There are commands during the game, commands for starting the small hit game, commands during the small hit game, commands for ending the small hit game, commands for the contents of the prize ball, and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the memory display effect using the storage marker or the like while referring to the effect command when the number of operation memories increases, the effect command when the number of operation memories decreases, and the like. ..

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the fourth symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or The content of the effect during the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is controlled (effect execution means). Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern for various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.).

Step S403: In the fireworks rushing effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of managing the contents of the effect to be executed during the fireworks rush. The details of the process will be described later.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 asks the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) for basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , Working memory effect pattern number, look-ahead notice effect pattern number, variation effect pattern number, change notice effect number, background pattern number, etc.) are instructed. As a result, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146 and VDP152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect execution means).

Step S406: In the lamp drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp drive circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp drive circuit 132 drives various lamps 46 to 52, a board lamp 53, and the like (on / off, blinking, change in luminance gradation, etc.) based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next acoustic drive process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs the effect content (for example, BGM during variable display effect, reach effect, mode transition effect, jackpot effect, etc.) to the acoustic drive circuit 134. Instruct. As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds according to the content of the effect.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates by using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

[Production design management process]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S502 to step S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change preprocessing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next step. Select the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) as the jump destination of. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) is selected as a jump destination when the big hit variable winning device management process is selected or the small hit variable winning device management process is selected in the main control CPU 72. To. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol change pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (reach other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence advance notice pattern, post-occurrence advance notice pattern, etc.) can be selected. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls the demo effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructed to the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the effect button is operated by the player, and an effect according to the result. The control information of the content (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) actually ends the variable display effect that has been executed up to that point in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effective manner (design effect execution). means).

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is operated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the big role effect according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 126 selects a large-feature effect pattern of the 16-round probability variation jackpot as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and displays this for the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To instruct. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the big role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production management process during fireworks rush]
65 to 67 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the effect management process during the fireworks rush. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the start of the fireworks rush. Whether or not it is the start of the fireworks rush can be confirmed by whether or not it is the first execution of this process after the gaming state shifts to the high-probability non-time reduction state. The game status can be confirmed by the status specification command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the fireworks rush has started (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S902, and when it cannot be confirmed that the fireworks rush has started (No), the effect control CPU 126 has step S904. To execute.

Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process for fireworks rush. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of displaying a background image for the fireworks rush and displaying an image of the payout point P used for the point effect. As the initial value to be displayed at the payout point P, it is preferable to display the number of game balls paid out in the big hit game as the initial value. However, the initial value displayed at the payout point P may be 0.

Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the start of a small hit. Whether or not it is the start of the small hit can be confirmed by the small hit game start command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S906, and when it cannot be confirmed that it is the start of the small hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 is the step S908. To execute.

Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of activating the small hit ACT. The small hit ACT is a module that manages the elapsed time (elapsed frame) during the small hit game.

Step S908: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a predetermined first frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. Whether or not a predetermined first frame has passed is managed by the small hit ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the predetermined first frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S910 and confirms that the predetermined first frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. If not (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912.

Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 executes the enlargement effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for enlarging and displaying the payout point P.

Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a predetermined second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. Whether or not a predetermined second frame has passed is managed by the small hit ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the predetermined second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914 and confirms that the predetermined second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. If it cannot be done (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes the reduction effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for reducing and displaying (returning to the original position) the payout point P that is enlarged and displayed.
When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the specified first frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. Whether or not the specified first frame has passed is managed by the small hit ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the specified first frame (for example, 70F) has elapsed from the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S918, and the specified first frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. If it cannot be confirmed that this has been done (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S920.

Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the second cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON. By setting the second cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON, a specific effect prohibition section (second prohibited section) is set.

Step S920: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a specified second frame (for example, 95F) has elapsed from the start of the small hit. Whether or not the specified second frame has passed is managed by the small hit ACT.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the specified second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S922 and confirms that the specified second frame has elapsed from the start of the small hit. If not (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S924.

Step S922: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of setting the first cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON. By setting the first cut-in effect prohibition flag to ON, a specific effect prohibition section (first prohibited section) is set.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 prohibits the execution of the cut-in effect (specific effect) when a predetermined time has elapsed during the execution of the small hit game (special game). It is possible to set a production prohibited section (specific production prohibited section setting means). The specific effect prohibition section is a section for prohibiting the execution of the cut-in effect (specific effect).

The specific production prohibited section is the first prohibited section (the section from turning on the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect to the end of the small hit game) and the second time, which prohibits the execution of the first specific effect. It has a second prohibited section (a section from turning on the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect to the end of the small hit game) that prohibits the execution of the specific effect.

The second prohibited section is set before the first prohibited section (the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is turned on after 70F from the start of the small hit, and the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect is set. Turns on after 95F from the start of small hits).
The first prohibited section is set during the second prohibited section (the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is turned on while the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is ON).
The end timing is the same for the first prohibited section and the second prohibited section (when the small hit ends, the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect and the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect are turned off. Become).

The cut-in effect (specific effect) has a first cut-in effect (first specific effect) and a second cut-in effect (second specific effect).
The predetermined conditions for not executing the cut-in effect are the condition that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect for prohibiting the first cut-in effect is turned on (the first predetermined condition) and the second cut. It has a condition (second predetermined condition) that the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect for prohibiting the in-effect is turned ON.
The prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is turned on before the prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect (the second predetermined condition is set before the first predetermined condition).
The prohibition flag for the first cut-in effect and the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect may be turned off at the same time (the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition end at the same time). There is).

Step S924: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the first ball entry has occurred during the small hit game. Whether or not the first ball entry has occurred can be confirmed by the prize ball content command. In addition to the prize ball command, the number of prize balls when winning a general winning opening (normal winning opening 22 etc.) and the starting opening (upper starting winning opening 26, right starting winning opening 27, lower starting winning opening 28b, etc.) ) May be targeted for the number of prize balls.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the first ball entry has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S926, and when it cannot be confirmed that the first ball entry has occurred (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B → B).

Step S926: The effect control CPU 126 executes the count-up counter calculation process. The details of the count-up counter calculation process will be described later.

Step S928: The effect control CPU 126 executes the count-up effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for counting up the number of the payout point P. The count-up effect is an effect that is updated and displayed at predetermined update intervals.

By executing such a process, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the small hit game (special game), the effect control CPU 126 is updated and displayed at a predetermined update interval. The count-up effect (first effect) can be executed (first effect execution means).

Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 executes the sound effect start process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for starting reproduction of the count-up SE.

Step S932: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is OFF (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S934, and the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is OFF. (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is ON, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B → B).

Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes the cut-in effect lottery process. Details of the cut-in effect lottery process will be described later.
When this process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S936 (connection symbol B → B).

By executing such a process, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the small hit game (special game), the effect control CPU 126 produces a cut-in effect (triggered by the ball entry). It is possible to execute (specific effect execution means).

Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not a second ball entry has occurred during the small hit game. Whether or not the second ball is entered can be confirmed by the prize ball content command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the second ball entry has occurred (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S938, and when it cannot be confirmed that the second ball entry has occurred (No), the effect control The CPU 126 executes step S948.

Step S938: The effect control CPU 126 executes the count-up counter calculation process. The details of the count-up counter calculation process will be described later.

Step S940: The effect control CPU 126 executes the count-up effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for counting up the number of the payout point P. The count-up effect is an effect that is updated and displayed at predetermined update intervals.

By executing such a process, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the small hit game (special game), the effect control CPU 126 is updated and displayed at a predetermined update interval. The count-up effect (first effect) can be executed (first effect execution means).

Step S942: The effect control CPU 126 executes the sound effect start process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting an effect pattern for starting reproduction of the count-up SE. When the count-up SE due to the first ball entry is being reproduced, it is possible to execute a process of selecting an effect pattern for continuously executing the reproduction of the count-up SE.

Step S944: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is OFF (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S946, and the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is OFF. (No), that is, when it is confirmed that the prohibition flag for the second cut-in effect is ON, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S948.

Step S946: The effect control CPU 126 executes the cut-in effect lottery process. Details of the cut-in effect lottery process will be described later.

By executing such a process, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the small hit game (special game), the effect control CPU 126 produces a cut-in effect (triggered by the ball entry). It is possible to execute (specific effect execution means).

Step S948: The effect control CPU 126 executes the count-up counter update process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of subtracting the count-up counter. For example, the count-up counter subtracts 1 after one frame has elapsed. When this process is executed once in one frame, the count-up counter is decremented by 1 each time this process is executed.

Step S950: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of confirming whether or not the count-up counter is 0.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the count-up counter is 0 (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S952, and when it cannot be confirmed that the count-up counter is 0 (No), that is, the count-up. When it is confirmed that the counter has a value other than 0, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S954.

Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 executes the sound effect end process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 ends (stops) the reproduction of the count-up SE.

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126 reproduces the count-up SE (second effect) when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the execution of the small hit game (special game). ), And the reproduction of the count-up SE can be terminated based on the predetermined number of prize balls and the predetermined update interval (second effect executing means).

Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the end of the small hit. Whether or not it is the end of the small hit can be confirmed by the small hit game end command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the end of the small hit (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S956, and when it cannot be confirmed that it is the end of the small hit (No), the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect. Return to the process (FIG. 63).

Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect to OFF.
Step S958: The effect control CPU 126 sets the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect to OFF.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 63).

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 sets the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect to ON (when a predetermined condition is set) or the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect. When it is ON (when a predetermined condition is set), even if the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 during the small hit game (special game), the cut-in effect (specific effect) is performed. It can be prevented from being executed (specific production execution means).

When the cut-in effect (specific effect) is executed multiple times, it is displayed alternately on the left and right, such as "display from the left side" → "display from the right side" → "display from the left side" (executed according to a predetermined rule). Ru).
When the prohibition flag of the first cut-in effect is ON or the prohibition flag of the second cut-in effect is ON, the cut-in effect lottery process itself is not executed, so that the specific effect prohibited section is executed. Even if the execution of the cut-in effect is prohibited by the setting of, the cut-in effect is displayed alternately on the left and right.

[Count-up counter calculation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the count-up counter calculation process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S960: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of calculating a count-up counter (special value).
The count-up counter can be calculated based on the calculation formula of "count-up counter = number of prize balls x update interval + count-up counter". The reason why the value of "count-up counter" is added as well as the value of "number of prize balls x update interval" is entered in the current "count-up counter". If so, this is to add the value of "number of prize balls x update interval" to that value (to extend the playback time of the count-up SE when the count-up SE is being replayed).

The number of prize balls can be confirmed by the prize ball content command (main command).
The update interval is an update interval for the count-up effect, and is predetermined by the specifications of the gaming machine and the like.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect management process (FIG. 66 or 67) during the fireworks rush.

By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 calculates the value (special value) of the count-up counter by multiplying the number of prize balls (predetermined number of prize balls) and the update interval (predetermined update interval). Then, the calculated count-up counter value is updated every frame (with the passage of time), and when the updated count-up counter value reaches 0 (specified value), the playback of the count-up SE is terminated. Can be done (second production execution means).

[Cut-in production lottery process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the cut-in effect lottery process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S970: The effect control CPU 126 executes the character lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining a character to be displayed in the cut-in effect by lottery. The character to be selected is determined except for the previously displayed character.

Step S972: The effect control CPU 126 executes the display pattern lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether to display the character selected in step S970 in a normal pattern or a special pattern by lottery.

Step S974: The effect control CPU 126 executes the appearance direction lottery process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining whether the character selected in step S970 appears from the left side or appears from the right side by lottery.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect management process (FIG. 66 or 67) during the fireworks rush.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a list of characters displayed in the cut-in effect.
Six characters, the first character to the sixth character, are prepared to be displayed in the cut-in effect.
In addition, each character has a normal pattern character (1st character C1 to 6th character C6) who does not wear a hat and glasses, and a special pattern character (1st character C11 ~) who wears a hat and glasses. The sixth character C16) is prepared.

For example, if the first character C1 of the normal pattern is displayed in the first prize at the time of a small hit, the first character C1 of the normal pattern and the first character C11 of the special pattern are displayed in the second prize at the time of the small hit. Character is displayed.
In addition, when the first character C1 of the normal pattern is displayed in the first prize at the time of a small hit, in the second prize at the time of a small hit, the first character C1 of the special pattern is excluded except for only the first character C1 of the normal pattern. Character C11 may be included in the selection candidates.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is one frame.
In FIG. 71 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 71 (B): When the game ball wins (wins) the second variable winning device 31, the count-up effect is started at the payout point P. The display of the payout point P is "1500".
In FIG. 71 (C): When one frame (1F) has elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become “1501”.
In FIG. 71 (D): When one frame (1F) has elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become "1502".
When the number of prize balls is large (for example, when the number of prize balls is 10 or more), the count-up effect can be quickly ended by setting the update interval to one frame.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an outline of the count-up effect when the update interval of the count-up effect is 2 frames.
In FIG. 72 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 72 (B): When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the count-up effect is started at the payout point P. The display of the payout point P is "1500".
In FIG. 72 (C): When two frames (2F) have elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become “1501”.
In FIG. 72 (D): When two frames (2F) have elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become “1502”.
When the number of prize balls is small (for example, when the number of prize balls is less than 10), the count-up effect can be carefully executed by setting the update interval to 2 frames.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an outline of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction of the prize ball number 9 and the update interval 1F to the stop of the count-up SE.
In FIG. 73 (A): The small hit game has started.
FIG. 73 (B): When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the count-up effect is started at the payout point P. The display of the payout point P is "1500". In this case, the count-up counter is set and the reproduction of the count-up SE starts. The count-up counter is set to 9 which is the value of "(number of prize balls 9) x (update interval 1F)".
In FIG. 73 (C): When one frame (1F) has elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become “1501”. After one frame has elapsed, the count-up counter is subtracted (-1).
In FIG. 73 (D): After 8 frames (8F) have elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by 8 to become “1509”. After 8 frames have elapsed, the count-up counter is subtracted (-8).
In this case, since the count-up counter becomes 0, the reproduction of the count-up SE ends (count-up SE stops).

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an outline of the flow from the count-up SE reproduction of the prize ball number 7 and the update interval 2F to the stop of the count-up SE.
In FIG. 74 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 74 (B): When the game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the count-up effect is started at the payout point P. The display of the payout point P is "1500". In this case, the count-up counter is set and the reproduction of the count-up SE starts. The count-up counter is set to 14, which is the value of "(number of prize balls 7) x (update interval 2F)".
In FIG. 74 (C): Since the update interval is 2F, the value of the payout point P does not increase and "1500" is maintained even after one frame (1F) has elapsed. However, when one frame has elapsed, the count-up counter is subtracted (-1).
In FIG. 74 (D): When one frame (1F) has elapsed, the value of the payout point P is increased by one to become "1501". After one frame has elapsed, the count-up counter is subtracted (-1).
In FIG. 74 (E): After 12 frames (12F) have elapsed, the value of the payout point P increases by 6 to become "1507". After 12 frames have elapsed, the count-up counter is subtracted (-12).
In this case, since the count-up counter becomes 0, the reproduction of the count-up SE ends (count-up SE stops).

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an outline of a cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a prize in a small hit during a small hit rush.
Here, an example is shown at the time when the small hit prize can be produced at the timing when both the first and second prizes can be produced.
In FIG. 75 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 75 (B): When the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the first cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C1 from the left side) is executed.
In FIG. 75 (C): When the second game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the second cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C2 from the right side) is executed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small hit after the second cut-in effect prohibition timing has elapsed.
Here, an example is shown at the time of winning at the timing when the small hit prize can be produced for the first time and the second production is prohibited.
In FIG. 76 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 76 (B): When the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the first cut-in effect (the effect of displaying the character C1 from the left side) is executed. Due to the count-up effect of the payout point P, the display of the payout point P is "1500".
In FIG. 76 (C): Even if the second game ball wins the second variable winning device 31 after 70F from the start of the small hit, the second cut-in effect is not executed (the second cut-in is prohibited). Actually, the character of the cut-in effect is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the count-up effect of the payout point P is executed). Due to the count-up effect of the payout point P, the display of the payout point P is "1515".
In FIG. 76 (D): Then, when the game ball further wins the second variable winning device 31, the character of the cut-in effect is not displayed, but the display of the payout point P becomes “1530” due to the count-up effect.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an outline of the cut-in effect operation at the time of winning a small hit after the lapse of the first cut-in effect prohibition timing.
Here, an example is shown at the time when the small hit prize is won at the timing when the production is prohibited for both the first and second times.
In FIG. 77 (A): The small hit game has started.
In FIG. 77 (B): Even if the first game ball wins the second variable winning device 31 after the small hit start 95F, the first cut-in effect is not executed (the first cut-in is prohibited). Actually, the character of the cut-in effect is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the count-up effect of the payout point P is executed). Due to the count-up effect of the payout point P, the display of the payout point P is "1500".
In FIG. 77 (C): After that, even if the second game ball wins the second variable winning device 31, the second cut-in effect is not executed because the small hit start 70F has elapsed (C). The second cut-in is prohibited). Actually, the character of the cut-in effect is not displayed, and only the payout point P is displayed (the count-up effect of the payout point P is executed). Due to the count-up effect of the payout point P, the display of the payout point P is "1515".
In FIG. 77 (D): Then, when the game ball further wins the second variable winning device 31, the character of the cut-in effect is not displayed, but the display of the payout point P becomes "1530" due to the count-up effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, since the reproduction of the count-up SE (second effect) is terminated based on the number of prize balls and the update interval, the number of prize balls and the update interval are changed due to a specification change or the like. Even if there is, it is possible to deal with it with the same control, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(2) According to the present embodiment, the value (special value) of the count-up counter is calculated by multiplication, the value of the count-up counter is updated, and the reproduction of the count-up SE is terminated, so that the multiplication or update (subtraction) is performed. ) And the like can end the reproduction of the count-up SE, and the control process can be simplified.

(3) The update interval of the count-up of the acquired balls (payout points P) changes according to the number of prize balls per small hit, but the number of prize balls may change due to changes in specifications or the like. In that case, it is necessary to change the count-up update interval according to the change in the number of prize balls, and there is a problem that the program must be changed each time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the count-up effect is performed by the attacker winning in the small hit during the small hit rush, the count-up SE is reproduced according to the effect, the count-up counter is prepared, and the counter is countered at the time of the attacker winning. The value of is set and the counter is subtracted by 1 every frame. Then, when the value of the count-up counter becomes 0, the count-up SE is stopped. At the time of winning the attacker, the value of the count-up counter is set as the number of prize balls (main command) × update interval (number of frames). As a result, even if the number of prize balls or the update interval is changed due to the specification change, the same control can be used from the reproduction to the stop of the count-up SE.

(4) According to the present embodiment, a count-up counter is prepared, and the set value of the count-up counter is set to "number of prize balls x count-up update interval", so that the count-up SE can be changed from the reproduction of the count-up SE to the count-up SE. The control up to the stop can be handled by the same control.

(5) According to the present embodiment, if the attacker wins a prize again during the count-up effect, "number of prize balls x count-up update interval" is added to the current counter value, and the counter subtraction is restarted. Therefore, it is possible to deal with the winning prize during the reproduction of the count-up SE with the same control.

(6) According to the present embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed during the execution of the small hit game, a small effect prohibition section for prohibiting the execution of the cut-in effect (specific effect) is set. It is possible to prevent the cut-in effect from being executed at a late stage during the execution of the hit game, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(7) According to the present embodiment, since the cut-in effect is prohibited by the two prohibited sections (the first prohibited section and the second prohibited section), it is flexible to the situation where the cut-in effect is executed a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

(8) According to the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is displayed alternately on the left and right even when the execution of the cut-in effect is prohibited by the setting of the specific effect prohibited section, so that the continuity of the effect is maintained. Not only can it be sustained, but it can also reduce the discomfort given to the player.

(9) When the small hit game during the small hit rush is won, the cut-in effect is executed up to two times, but depending on the winning timing, the cut-in effect does not end at the end of the small hit game, or the next fluctuation is large. There is a problem that the cut-in effect may continue across the parts.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ACT dedicated to the small hit is activated at the start of the small hit during the small hit rush, and when the specified number of frames is reached, the first cut-in effect prohibition flag and the second cut-in effect prohibition flag are turned on. To.
Then, at the time of winning the attacker during the small hit game, the cut-in prohibition flag is referred to to determine whether or not the character to be displayed is drawn.
As a result, the cut-in effect can be executed only at the timing that does not affect the next fluctuation or does not significantly affect the next fluctuation.

(10) In the present embodiment, the "second cut-in prohibition flag" is set to ON 70 frames after the start of the small hit, and the "first cut-in prohibition flag" is turned ON 95 frames after the start of the small hit. Since it is set to, the cut-in effect can be performed only at the timing that does not affect the next fluctuation or greatly affects the next fluctuation.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of the effect given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of the above-mentioned effect.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having no probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a probability variation region.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine, but the present invention may be applied to a non-simultaneous turning machine.

Although the special game has been described with the example of the small hit game, it may be a big hit game or a normal electric accessory open game.

The second effect has been described with the example of the effect by sound (count-up SE), but the effect may be an image effect or a light effect. Further, the second effect may be a combination of a sound effect, an image effect, and a light effect.

Although the number of prize balls and the update interval have been described in the fixed example, they may change depending on the game state and the progress of the game.
The target of the count-up counter (the content of the number of prize balls for calculating the count-up counter) may be the sum of not only the prize ball content command but also the number of prize balls associated with winning the prize at the starting port.
The prize ball content command may be provided with a prize ball type (difference in the number of prize balls), and the update interval, the character to be displayed, and the count-up SE may be changed depending on the prize ball type (difference in the number of prize balls).

The images given in the other production examples are just examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and these can be appropriately deformed.

FIG. 78 is a front view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. Further, FIG. 79 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of another embodiment. In the following description, basically, the same description as that of the above-described embodiment is omitted, but there are some parts that are duplicated. Further, with respect to the reference numerals in the drawings, there are parts having the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment and parts having different reference numerals. The major difference between the above-described embodiment and the other embodiment is that the decorative unit is attached to the front upper part of the pachinko machine of the other embodiment. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine of another embodiment will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

Here, in the present specification, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the pachinko machine 1, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the top side when viewed from the player. The explanation is that the lower side is the bottom when viewed from the person, the front side is the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is the rear side when viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 has fasteners such as screws for island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edge portion (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. With the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof makes it impossible to open the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 together with the locking tool. ..

Further, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the game hall inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (a game area on which the game ball flows down, a board surface) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 toward the front surface as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a model connected to a card unit, and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper plate 6b or lower plate 6b or lower plate) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It will be paid out in 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a card unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) worth of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the card unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the example of the model connected to the card unit is described, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the card unit).

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can, for example, push the upper plate ball removal button 6d to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can push the lower plate ball removing lever 6e backward to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 and launch (launch) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration in the game area 8a will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower side of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right lighting unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in a glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probable change promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

Further, around the push button 64, a ring-shaped portion 65 is installed so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. To. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off like the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside thereof. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Decorative unit]
A decorative unit 800 is attached to the upper front part of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative unit 800 can be attached to and detached from the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined mounting member (mechanical mechanism such as a screw or a hook). The decorative unit 800 may be non-removable from the pachinko machine 1.
The decorative unit 800 (decorative object) is a box-shaped member, and is composed of a transparent or translucent member that transmits light. The decorative unit 800 is a cube-shaped member on which predetermined character information is displayed, and the LED (for example, the left top lens unit 47 or the glass frame top lamp 46) arranged in the rear integrated door unit 4 emits light. It emits light.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 79, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the payout device unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the payout control board unit 176, and the back cover Unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), external terminal boards 160, power cord (power plug) 164, which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, are used. A ground wire (earth terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), etc. are installed.

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for a setting key. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing a RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to the setting related to the game of the pachinko machine 1.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the keyhole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without reference numeral), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game ball stored in the prize ball tank 172a is guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal board 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island facility of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 80 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 of another embodiment alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side portion of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area L) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right side portion of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game). It is a second gaming area (right-handed area R, specific area) used in a state, a small hit game state, a low probability time shortening state, a high probability time shortening state, etc.). The left side portion of the gaming area 8a is also used in the high probability non-time shortening state (advantageous gaming state). Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and the one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged on the lower left of the first variable winning device 30. There is.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a mainly passes through the start gate 20, enters the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enters the first variable winning device 30 during open operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit a game ball into the area) (perform a so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side in the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform a so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It is possible to enter a ball into the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) recessed from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b catches the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the conditions of the 5th round, or the 7th to 10th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) are satisfied, and it is possible to enter the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generation means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged below the variable starting winning device 28 (upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position to the open position by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the figure, the opening / closing member 30a is in the closed position (closed state) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to win the first prize opening 30b (the first prize opening 30b is closed). be. When the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced so as to fall to the right with the lower end edge portion thereof as a hinge, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state where the inflow of game balls is not impossible, and the event of winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30b can be generated. At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the inflow of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30b. The game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30b passes through the first count switch 84, and after the winning is detected, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the collection passage (without reference numeral).

The second variable winning device 31 is said to be a predetermined second condition (for example, the sixth round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode). It operates when the condition) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second large winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special winning event generating means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged below the first variable winning device 30 (lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a, so that the opening / closing member 31a is moved to the second large winning opening 31b. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second big winning opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state where the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends to the lower left from the second large winning opening 31b, and branches into two at the end.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guide passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability change region and a hole 31e for the probability change region are arranged on the lower right side of the guide passage 31c. A discharge port 31f (discharge region) is arranged on the lower left side of the 31c.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is ON, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (open position) retracted deeper than the board surface, and the game ball. Is led to the hole 31e for the probabilistic region. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region solenoid that operates the probabilistic region blade member 31d is turned off, the probabilistic region blade member 31d moves to a position (closed position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, so that the game is played. The sphere passes through the upper part of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability change area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probabilistic region is a region in which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the vane member 31d for the probabilistic region operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area where the game ball can pass.

The probabilistic region blade member 31d may operate during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region is such that the probabilistic region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for several seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probabilistic region is opened for a long period of time. One of a long opening pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds) and a short opening pattern that opens a short opening for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round is applied. .. Which operation pattern is used to operate the probabilistic region blade member 31d can be selected by the winning symbol. Specifically, a long open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a long time is selected when the probabilistic symbol is won, and a short open pattern that opens the probabilistic region for a short time is selected when the normal symbol is won.

As the operation pattern of the probabilistic region blade member 31d, only the pattern in which the probabilistic region blade member 31d is long-opened is applied, and when the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened and the round ends, the probabilistic region The opportunity for the blade member 31d to open for a long time may be eliminated. Further, since the game ball does not reach the probability change region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, it is difficult to guide the game ball to the probability change region by this operation.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the low probability state is changed to the high probability state after the big hit game is completed. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (high probability time reduction state). On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit game. At this time, the transition from the non-time reduction state to the time reduction state may be performed (low probability time reduction state).

The effect unit 40 is installed in the game board unit 8 from the center position to the right side portion. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. .. As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added. A ring-shaped logo LED unit 900 is arranged in front of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating the shape of a spade). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. .. A blade member that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the entrance of the ball guide passage 40d, and a distribution device that is constantly movable by a solenoid (not shown) is placed at the exit of the ball guide passage 40d (a game ball at the middle start winning opening 26). A device for sorting whether or not to induce a solenoid) may be arranged.

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game balls that have entered the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are also driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

[Visibility of the upper end of the outer rail]
FIG. 81 is a schematic view showing a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 78. FIG. 81 shows a cross section cut along a plane parallel to the vertical direction and the front-rear direction passing through the upper end (top, upper end of the outer peripheral surface 502 (outer rail)) of the game area 8a. The cross section shown in FIG. 81 also passes through the upper end (top) of the inner peripheral surface 504 (inner rail) and the upper end (top) of the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 (design member).

The rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the game area 8a in the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a). That is, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located below the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500. Further, the rear end of the lower surface 852 of the decorative unit 800 is located above the lower end of the game ball X (the game ball in contact with the upper end of the upper surface 840a of the guidance passage 500) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. is doing. More specifically, it is located above the center of the game ball X in this state (the position shown by the alternate long and short dash line Y in FIG. 81).

Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the center of the game ball X in a state of being located at the upper end of the game area 8a. That is, the lower end of the protrusion 856 is located below the center of the game ball X in that state. More specifically, the lower end of the protruding portion 856 is located below the lower end of the game ball X in the state. Further, the protruding portion 856 projects downward from the upper end of the lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500.

As is clear from the above, the decorative unit 800 overlaps with the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). , It is designed to cover the entire game ball X in the state. Further, in the decorative unit 800, the portion corresponding to the upper end of the game area 8a at the rear end of the lower surface 852 (the front part of the upper end of the game area 8a) is in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the game board unit 8 and the glass unit G). The game ball X is not overlapped with at least the lower half of the game ball X located at the upper end of the game area 8a, and does not cover at least the lower half of the game ball in the state. Further, the rear portion of the lower surface 852 is an inclined surface 854. Therefore, even when the game ball is located at the upper end of the game area 8a, the player can easily see the game ball rolling in the game area 8a. Here, it is preferable that at least the lower half of the game ball in the state can be seen from a predetermined position, specifically, the player's eye point, without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. The player's eye point means the position of the player's eyes when sitting on a chair and playing a game. Specifically, for example, when the distance between the glass unit G and the player's eyes in the front-rear direction is less than 50 to 90 cm, at least a part of the game ball in the state without the player moving his / her face up / down / left / right. It is good to be able to see (lower half). That is, the decorative unit 800 is on a straight line from a predetermined point where the distance from the glass unit G is less than 50 to 90 cm to the game ball X (the portion below the center of the game ball X) located at the upper end of the game area 8a. It is good that it does not take.

The following features can be derived from the configuration of FIG. 81. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A front frame (integrated door unit 4) having a design part (top lens part, decorative unit 800) and an inner frame (inner frame assembly 7) having a game board (game board unit 8) are provided at the upper part. It is a gaming machine.
(2) A game area 8a is formed on the game board.
(3) At the upper part of the game area 8a, there is a guide passage 500 that guides the game ball to the right-handed area.
(4) The guide passage 500 has an outer peripheral surface (outer peripheral surface 502, upper surface 840a of the guide passage 500) and an inner peripheral surface (inner peripheral surface 504, lower surface 840b of the guide passage 500).
(5) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is defined as the first reference line L1.
(6) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(7) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 (among the parts where the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1 can intersect the vertical lines intersecting with the first reference line L1), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(8) The first design portion D1 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension A) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm). The diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm.
(9) The second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the first reference line L1 and the distance (dimension B) from the first reference line L1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can.
Further, when the game ball is strongly launched (game ball passage) by making the distance between the first reference line L1 and the first design part D1 smaller than the diameter of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way. When the game ball rolls along the upper surface of the above), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

(10) Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the game board surface, the part located directly below the top of the outer peripheral surface on the inner peripheral surface (the part on the right side of the point B, the part on the left side of the point B, and the part that becomes the point B). ) Is the second reference line L2.
(11) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect with the second reference line L2), the design The rearmost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as the first design portion D1.
(12) Of the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 (among the portions where the vertical lines intersecting with the second reference line L2 can intersect with the second reference line L2), the design The lowermost portion on the lower surface of the portion is referred to as a second design portion D2.
(13) The first design portion D1 is located above the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension C) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm).
(14) The second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2, and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm).
Since the second design portion D2 is located below the second reference line L2 and the distance (dimension D) from the second reference line L2 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the design portion can be enlarged. can. Further, when the game ball is launched weakly by making the distance between the second reference line L2 and the first design part D1 equal to or larger than the radius of the game ball while increasing the size of the design part in this way (game ball passage). When the game ball rolls along the lower surface of the game ball), the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.
By adopting such a configuration, the visibility of the game board surface can be ensured by the structure.

[Arrangement of positioning holes on the outer rail]
FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outer rail. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a game board, an outer rail, and a rail base. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing how the game ball comes into contact with the outer rail. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outer rail and a game board.
As shown in FIG. 82, the outer rail 600 is a bendable thin plate-shaped horizontally long member. The outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of predetermined guide portions 601 (holes) for guiding the attachment position to the game board (rail base 700). Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a plurality of holes 602 used for processing the outer rail 600. The hole 602 is smaller in size than the guide portion 601.

The distance Wc from the center of the predetermined guide portion 601 (hole) to the end (lower end in the figure) of the outer rail 600 is set to 2.7 mm. That is, the predetermined guide portion 601 is arranged at a position where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit. More specifically, all the predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged at positions where the game ball rolling on the inner guide surface of the outer rail 600 does not hit.

As shown in FIG. 83, the rail base 700 is arranged in front of the game plate 8b, and the curved outer rail 600 is arranged on the curved guide surface 702 inside the rail base 700. A plurality of protrusions 701 are formed on the guide surface 702 at positions corresponding to the predetermined guide portions 601.

As shown in FIG. 84, the outer rail 600 is arranged on the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700. A protrusion 701 of the rail base 700 is inserted into a predetermined guide portion 601 of the outer rail 600, whereby the outer rail 600 is positioned on the rail base 700. Here, the protrusion 701 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball X.

As shown in FIG. 85, the outer rail 600 is arranged in front of the game board 8b, passes from the start end (PS) of the outer rail 600 on the lower left, passes through the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 on the left side, and is on the upper side. It is curved so as to pass through the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 and reach the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 on the upper right.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A gaming machine including a gaming board (game board unit 8, game board 8b, rail base 700) forming a game area, and an outer rail 600 provided on the game board.
(2) The outer rail 600 has a predetermined guide portion 601 for guiding the mounting position to the game board (holes (many) for inserting the protrusions 701, holes for mounting the positioning pins, and cutouts for fitting the protrusions 701). Are formed in plurality. Further, the outer rail 600 is formed with a hole 602 used when processing the outer rail 600.
(3) In a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set as the first range (H1), and the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is set. The range from the upper end (PU) to the upper end (PU) is defined as the second range (H2), and the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is defined as the third range (H3).
(4) The number of predetermined guide portions 601 is larger in the first range (H1) (for example, 3) than in the second range (H2) (for example, 2), and is in the second range (H2). There are more than the third range (H3) (for example, 0).

As a result, a large number of predetermined guide portions 601 are arranged on the ball launcher side where the impact received from the game ball is large and the arrangement of the outer rail 600 is particularly required to be accurate, and the outer rail 600 on the ball launcher side is displaced. And vibration can be reliably prevented.
Further, the terminal side of the outer rail 600, which receives a small impact from the game ball and has little influence on the game, has a small number of predetermined guide portions 601 so that the outer rail 600 can be easily processed and attached to the rail base 700. can do.

(5) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(6) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the third range (H3) in the first range (H1) and the third in the second range (H2). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(7) Instead of the above (4), the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is equal to or larger than the second range (H2) in the first range (H1) and the third in the first range (H1). There is more than the range (H3) of.
(8) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed at the upper apex (PU) and the left apex (PL) of the outer rail 600.

(9) The predetermined guide portion 601 is not formed in the third range (H3).
(10) The predetermined guide portion 601 is formed at a position where the game balls do not come into contact with each other (for example, a position avoiding a trajectory with which the game balls come into contact).
(11) The outer rail 600 is supported along the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700, and the guide surface 702 of the rail base 700 is inclined so that the game ball does not easily flow in the forward direction.
(12) The predetermined guide portions 601 are not evenly arranged at each other.

(13) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the left end (PL) of the outer rail 600 is the fourth range (H4). ), And the range from the left end (PL) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the fifth range (H5), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the fourth range (H4) (for example, 3). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the fifth range (H5) (for example, two pieces).
(14) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the upper end (PU) of the outer rail 600 is the sixth range (H6). ), And the range from the upper end (PU) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the seventh range (H7), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the sixth range (H6) (for example, five). ) Is more than the seventh range (H7) (for example, 0).
(15) Instead of the above (3) and (4), in a state where the outer rail 600 is provided on the game board, the range from the start end (PS) to the middle (PM) of the outer rail 600 is the eighth range (H8). ), And the range from the middle (PM) to the end (PE) of the outer rail 600 is the ninth range (H9), and the number of predetermined guide portions 601 is the eighth range (H8) (for example, 4). The number of pieces) is larger than that of the ninth range (H9) (for example, one piece).
Then, by adopting such a configuration, the trajectory of the game ball can be stabilized and the game can be performed according to the design value.

The invention may be a combination of the invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail] and the invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail], and has been described in the above embodiment. The invention may be a combination of an invention having a configuration, an invention having the configuration described in [Visibility of the upper end portion of the outer rail], and an invention having the configuration described in [Arrangement of positioning holes of the outer rail]. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the trajectory of the gaming ball and playing the game as designed. Further, by stabilizing the trajectory of the game ball, it is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the game ball from the lower surface side of the decorative unit.

[Dimensions of the finger hook of the handle]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the periphery of a handle having an operating angle of 0 degrees (minimum angle), and FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the periphery of a handle having an operating angle of 100 degrees (maximum angle).
The handle 950 (launch handle) is a circular member formed in a dome shape. The handle 950 is provided with three radially projecting finger hooks 952 (952a, 952b, 952c) around a centrally located circular member.
As shown in FIG. 86, when the handle 950 is not operated, the first finger hook portion 952a located on the left side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side surface of the thumb of the player's right hand. Further, when the handle 950 is not operated, the second finger hook portion 952b located on the upper side of the handle 950 mainly comes into contact with the right side surface of the index finger of the player's right hand. Further, when the handle 950 is not operated, the third finger hook portion 952c located on the diagonally upper right side of the handle 950 mainly contacts the right side surface of the middle finger of the player's right hand.
The handle 950 can rotate from the initial position (position shown in FIG. 86) to the maximum rotation position (position shown in FIG. 87).

The distance D1 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the first finger hook portion 952a is, for example, 53.4 mm.
The distance D2 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the second finger hook portion 952b is, for example, 45.6 mm.
The distance D3 from the center of the handle 950 to the tip of the third finger hook portion 952c is, for example, 39.3 mm.
The distance E from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the handle 950 is, for example, 34.6 mm.
The distance F from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 40.0 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the lower end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 45.0 mm.
The distance G from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the integrated door unit 4 is, for example, 49.1 mm. The distance from the center of the handle 950 to the right end of the inner frame assembly 7 is, for example, 51.1 mm.
These numerical values are merely examples and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game and the like.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) A main body frame (front door and middle door) having a front frame (front door, integrated door unit 4) and an inner frame (middle door, inner frame assembly 7), and an outer frame (outer) to which the main body frame can be attached. It is a gaming machine equipped with a frame unit 2).
(2) The main body frame has a handle 950 (launch handle, handle unit 16).
(3) The handle 950 has a finger hook portion 952.
(4) The handle 950 can rotate from the initial position to the maximum rotation position.
(5) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame (the lower edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(6) When the handle 950 is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame.

As a result, even when the main body frame is placed on the floor or the like, the finger hook portion 952 does not come into contact with the floor or the like, and the handle 950 is not damaged. Therefore, the risk of damage to the parts can be reduced.

(7) Regardless of the rotation position of the handle 950, the finger hook portion 952 may not protrude below the lower edge of the main body frame.
(8) When the handle 950 is in the initial position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame (the right edge of either the front frame or the inner frame).
(9) When the handle 950 is in the maximum rotation position, the finger hook portion 952 does not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame.
(10) Regardless of the rotation position of the handle 950, the finger hook portion 952 may not protrude to the right of the right edge of the main body frame.
(11) Assuming that the finger hook portion having the largest protrusion amount is the maximum finger hook portion (first finger hook portion 952a), the tip end portion (PT) of the maximum finger hook portion is the lowest point (PT) of the rotation trajectory at the maximum rotation position. It may not be located in PB).

[Torque of the handle]
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 1).
As for the torque (operating torque) of the handle of the first embodiment, the torque required for the initial movement is 6.8 N · mm, and the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 13.6 N · mm. The torque required to rotate the handle to the right-handed reference position is 23.8 N · mm. The handle that has moved to the right-handed reference position returns to the origin by the reaction force of the spring.

Further, in the handle of the first embodiment, the amount of movement from the initial position (initial movement) to the left-handed reference position (hereinafter referred to as "movement amount A") is 6.8 mm, and right-handed from the left-handed reference position. The amount of movement to the reference position (hereinafter referred to as "movement amount B") is 10.2 mm. Although not shown, the operating angle to the left-handed reference position is 49.0 degrees, and the operating angle to the right-handed reference position is 100.0 degrees. Regarding the amount of movement, A <B (6.8 <10.2) and 2A> B (13.6> 10.2).

As described above, the handle of the first embodiment reduces the operation torque required for the initial movement, minimizes the amount of movement, and lays down the torque curve, so that it is hard to get tired even if the game is played for a long time.

As for the torque of the handle in the comparative example, the torque required for initial movement is 31 N ・ mm, the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 69 N ・ mm, and the handle is rotated to the right-handed reference position. The torque required for this is 152 N · mm.

Further, in the handle of the comparative example, the movement amount A is 38 mm and the movement amount B is 83 mm. That is, A <B (38 <83), but not 2A> B (76 <83).

As described above, the handle of the comparative example has a high initial torque and a rapid torque movement, so that it is very easy to get tired.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the torque of the handle and the movable position of the handle (Example 2).
As for the torque of the handle of the second embodiment, the torque required for the initial movement is 27.2 N · mm, the torque required to rotate the handle to the left-handed reference position is 54.4 N · mm, and the right-handed reference position. The torque required to rotate the handle is 95.2 N · mm.

Further, in the handle of the second embodiment, the movement amount A is 27.2 mm and the movement amount B is 40.8 mm. That is, A <B (27.2 <40.8) and 2A> B (54.4> 40.8).

As described above, the handle of the second embodiment has a slightly larger operating torque required for the initial movement than the first embodiment, but is smaller than the comparative example, and the torque curve is laid down for a long time by minimizing the movement amount. It is hard to get tired even if you play a game.

The torque of the handle of the comparative example is the same as that of FIG. 88.

The following features can be derived from the configurations shown in these figures. It can be a gaming machine having at least one of the following configurations shown in parentheses.
(1) The operating torque required for rotation from the initial position of the handle (necessary for initial movement) is the first operating torque (6.8 N · mm).
(2) The operating torque required for rotation from the initial position of the handle to the left-handed reference position (bump position) is defined as the second operating torque (13.6 N · mm).
(3) The operating torque required for rotation from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position (right-handed reference position, full stroke position) is defined as the third operating torque (23.8 N · mm).
(4) The second operating torque is larger than the first operating torque.
(5) The third operating torque is larger than the second operating torque.
(6) The third operation torque is less than twice the second operation torque.

In this way, since the difference between the second operating torque and the third operating torque is small, the operating torque does not increase sharply between the left-handed reference position and the maximum rotation position, and the player can use the second operating torque. I feel that the difference between the third operation torque and the third operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(7) Further, the second operation torque is less than twice the first operation torque.
In this way, since the difference between the first operating torque and the second operating torque is small, the operating torque does not increase sharply between the initial position and the left-handed reference position, and the player can use the first operating torque. I feel that the difference between the second operation torque and the second operation torque is small. Therefore, the player is less likely to get tired, and the burden on the player can be reduced.

(8) The operation angle from the initial position of the steering wheel to the left-handed reference position is defined as the first operation angle (45 to 60 degrees).
(9) The operation angle from the initial position of the handle to the maximum rotation position is defined as the second operation angle (100 to 120 degrees).
(10) The first operating angle (for example, 45 degrees) is less than half of the second operating angle (for example, 100 degrees).

By adopting the configuration described in [Handle Torque], it is possible to provide a handle unit that minimizes the operation torque and its movement (displacement) that are not tiring even in a long-time right-handed game. The firing handle (handle operation unit) has a structure in which the origin is returned by a spring, but the player always operates in the opposite direction to this spring reaction force to play the game. By reducing the torque at the time of initial movement of this reaction force and minimizing the amount of movement (displacement amount), it is possible to provide a handle unit that does not get tired easily. Specifically, in the first and second embodiments described above, the initial torque is suppressed to the minimum force that can return to the origin, and the torque curve is laid down to realize a handle unit that does not get tired easily.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 26 Top start winning opening 27 Right starting winning opening 28 Variable start winning device 30 1st variable winning device 31 2nd variable winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory Lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory lamp 35a 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 LCD display 45 Direction switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main Control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A variable ball entry device that can shift from a closed state to an open state,
When a player wins a predetermined lottery, a special game execution means for executing a special game using the variable ball entry device and a special game execution means.
When the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game, it is provided with a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect triggered by the ball entry.
The specific effect executing means is
When a predetermined condition is set, even if the game ball enters the variable ball entry device during the execution of the special game, the specific effect may not be executed.
The front frame with the design part formed on the top,
A game board in which a game area having a left-handed area and a right-handed area is formed,
A guide passage that is arranged in the upper part of the game area, has an outer peripheral surface and an inner peripheral surface, and guides the game ball to the right-handed area.
Of the lines extending in the direction perpendicular to the board surface of the game board, the line passing through the top of the outer peripheral surface is set as the first reference line.
Of the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line can intersect, the rearmost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is designated as the first design portion.
Of the portions where the vertical lines with respect to the first reference line can intersect, the lowermost portion on the lower surface of the design portion is defined as the second design portion.
The first design portion is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball.
The second design unit is located below the first reference line, and the distance from the first reference line is equal to or larger than the diameter of the gaming ball.

Images